TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C/TDS1000C

TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C/TDS1000C
xx
ZZZ
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C/TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B/TDS1000B, TDS2000/TDS1000, TDS200 and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series Digital Oscilloscopes
Programmer
*P077044403*
077-0444-03
xx
ZZZ
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C/TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B/TDS1000B, TDS2000/TDS1000, TDS200 and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series Digital Oscilloscopes
Programmer
www.tektronix.com
077-0444-03
Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries
or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
OpenChoice® is a registered trademark of Tektronix Inc.
Tektronix is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash® trademark.
PictBridge is a trademark of the Standard of Camera & Imaging Products Association CIPA DC-001-2003 Digital
Photo Solutions for Imaging Devices.
Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14150 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
For product information, sales, service, and technical support:
In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
Table of Contents
Preface ..............................................................................................................
Related Documents ...........................................................................................
Conventions ..................................................................................................
iii
iv
vii
Getting Started
Getting Started ....................................................................................................
1-1
Syntax and Commands
Command Syntax................................................................................................. 2-1
Command Syntax ............................................................................................ 2-1
Command and Query Structure ............................................................................ 2-2
Command Entry.............................................................................................. 2-4
Constructed Mnemonics .................................................................................... 2-6
Argument Types.............................................................................................. 2-7
Command Groups .............................................................................................. 2-11
Acquisition Commands ................................................................................... 2-11
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands ................................................................. 2-11
Counter Commands (TBS1000B/EDU models only).................................................. 2-12
Cursor Commands ......................................................................................... 2-12
Data Logging Commands (Available Only On TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series
Models) ................................................................................................ 2-13
Display Commands ........................................................................................ 2-13
FFT Commands (TBS1000B/EDU models only) ...................................................... 2-15
File System Commands (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2MEM Module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Only) ............................ 2-15
Hard Copy Commands .................................................................................... 2-17
Horizontal Commands .................................................................................... 2-17
Limit Test Commands (Available Only On TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series
Models) ................................................................................................ 2-18
Math Commands........................................................................................... 2-20
Measurement Commands ................................................................................. 2-22
Miscellaneous Commands ................................................................................ 2-23
PictBridge Commands (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Only) ..................................................................................... 2-24
Power and Battery-Related Commands (TPS2000B and TPS2000 Only) .......................... 2-25
Power Measurement (TPS2000B/TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application Key
Installed Only)......................................................................................... 2-25
RS-232 Commands (TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Only) ........... 2-28
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
i
Table of Contents
Save and Recall Commands ..............................................................................
Status and Error Commands ..............................................................................
Trend Plot Commands (TBS1000B models only)......................................................
Trigger Commands ........................................................................................
Vertical Commands ........................................................................................
Waveform Commands.....................................................................................
Zoom Commands (TBS1000B/EDU models only) ....................................................
Command Descriptions ........................................................................................
Manual Conventions.......................................................................................
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-32
2-32
2-36
2-39
2-39
Status and Events
Status and Events .................................................................................................
Registers ......................................................................................................
Queues ........................................................................................................
Event Handling Sequence...................................................................................
Synchronization Methods ...................................................................................
3-1
3-1
3-4
3-5
3-7
Programming Examples
Programming Examples .........................................................................................
4-1
Appendices
Appendix A: ASCII Code Chart ...............................................................................
Appendix B: Factory Setup.....................................................................................
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series Oscilloscopes.....
TPS2000 Series Oscilloscopes ............................................................................
TPS2000B Series Oscilloscopes ..........................................................................
TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Oscilloscopes...........................................................
TDS210 and TDS220 Oscilloscopes .....................................................................
TDS224 Oscilloscopes .....................................................................................
Appendix C: Reserved Words ..................................................................................
A-1
B-1
B-1
B-2
B-4
B-5
B-7
B-8
C-1
Glossary
ii
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Preface
This programmer manual provides information on how to remotely operate your
oscilloscope. You can use communication ports and protocols, such as for the
RS-232, the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB), or Universal Serial Bus
(USB) standards, to remotely control and operate your oscilloscope.
This document supports the following products:
TBS1000B/EDU Series instructions, any version
TBS1000 Series instruments, any version
TPS2000 and TPS2000B Series instruments, any version.
TDS1000C-EDU, any version.
TDS2000C Series instruments, any version.
TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series instruments, any version.
TDS2CM or TDS2CMA, any version, when used in TDS1000 or TDS2000
Series instruments, any version.
TDS2MEM any version, when used in most TDS1000 or TDS2000 Series
instruments (except TDS1001 and TDS2004 models), any version.
TDS2CM, TDS2CMA, or TDS2MM any version, when used in a
TDS224 instrument, any version.
TDS2CM or TDS2CMA version CMV:v1.04 and above, or TDS2MM any
version, when used in TDS210 and TDS220 instruments with FV:v1.09 and
above.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
iii
Preface
Related Documents
Each series of oscilloscopes has a different set of documentation.
TBS1000B/EDU Series
Manuals
TBS1000 Series Manuals
TPS2000 and TPS2000B
Series Manuals
Language
TBS user manual part number
English
077-0886-XX
French
077-0887-XX
Italian
077-0888-XX
German
077-0889-XX
Spanish
077-0890-XX
Japanese
077-0891-XX
Portuguese
077-0892-XX
Simplified Chinese
077-0893-XX
Traditional Chinese
077-0894-XX
Korean
077-0895-XX
Russian
077-0896-XX
Language
TBS user manual part number
English
077-0760-XX
French
077-0761-XX
Italian
077-0762-XX
German
077-0763-XX
Spanish
077-0764-XX
Japanese
077-0765-XX
Portuguese
077-0766-XX
Simplified Chinese
077-0767-XX
Traditional Chinese
077-0768-XX
Korean
077-0769-XX
Russian
077-0770-XX
For general operation, refer to your product user manual, a standard accessory,
listed in the following table.
Language
TPS user manual part number
TPS2000 Series
iv
TPS2000B Series
English
071-1441-XX
071-2722-XX
French
071-1442-XX
071-2723-XX
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Preface
Language
TPS user manual part number
TPS2000 Series
TPS2000B Series
Italian
071-1443-XX
071-2724-XX
German
071-1444-XX
071-2725-XX
Spanish
071-1445-XX
071-2726-XX
Japanese
071-1446-XX
071-2727-XX
Portuguese
071-1447-XX
071-2728-XX
Simplified Chinese
071-1448-XX
071-2729-XX
Traditional Chinese
071-1449-XX
071-2730-XX
Korean
071-1450-XX
071-2731-XX
Russian
071-1451-XX
071-2732-XX
For information on the TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application, refer to the
TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Application User Manual, an optional accessory
available in eleven languages.
Language
TPS2PWR1 user manual part number
English
071-1452-XX
French
071-1453-XX
Italian
071-1454-XX
German
071-1455-XX
Spanish
071-1456-XX
Japanese
071-1457-XX
Portuguese
071-1458-XX
Simplified Chinese
071-1459-XX
Traditional Chinese
071-1460-XX
Korean
071-1461-XX
Russian
071-1462-XX
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
v
Preface
TDS1000, TDS2000,
TDS1000C-EDU, and
TDS2000C Series manuals
For general operation, refer to the user manual for your product. For information
on the TDS2CMA Communications module, refer to the TDS1000 and TDS2000
Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope User Manual.
Language
User manual part number
TDS1000/TDS2000
TDS1000B/TDS2000B TDS1000C-EDU/TDS2000C
English
071-1064-XX
071-1817-XX
071-2722-XX
French
071-1065-XX
071-1818-XX
071-2723-XX
Italian
071-1066-XX
071-1819-XX
071-2724-XX
German
071-1067-XX
071-1820-XX
071-2725-XX
Spanish
071-1068-XX
071-1821-XX
071-2726-XX
Japanese
071-1069-XX
071-1822-XX
071-2727-XX
Portuguese
071-1070-XX
071-1823-XX
071-2728-XX
Simplified Chinese
071-1071-XX
071-1824-XX
071-2729-XX
Traditional Chinese
071-1072-XX
071-1825-XX
071-2730-XX
Korean
071-1073-XX
071-1826-XX
071-2731-XX
Russian
071-1074-XX
071-1827-XX
071-2732-XX
For information on the TDS2MEM Storage Memory and Communications
module, refer to the TDS2MEM Storage Memory and Communications Module
User Manual (071-1262-XX), an optional accessory that includes eleven
languages.
TDS200 Series Manuals
For general operation, refer to the TDS200 Series Digital Real-Time Oscilloscope
User Manual, a standard accessory.
Language
User manual part number
English
071-0398-XX
French
071-0400-XX
Italian
071-0401-XX
German
071-0402-XX
Spanish
071-0399-XX
Japanese
071-0405-XX
Portuguese
071-0403-XX
Simplified Chinese
071-0406-XX
Traditional Chinese
071-0407-XX
Korean
071-0408-XX
Russian
071-0404-XX
For information on the TDS2CMA Communications module, or TDS2MM
Math Measurements module, refer to the TDS200 Series Extension Modules
Instructions Manual (071-0409-XX), a standard accessory for extension modules
in English only.
vi
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Preface
Service Manuals (English
Only)
For information on how to service your oscilloscope, refer to the appropriate
manual from the following optional accessories:
TBS1000B/EDU Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual
(077-0897-XX)
TBS1000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual
(077-0772-XX)
TDS2000C and TDS1000C-EDU Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service
Manual (077-0446-XX)
TDS1000B and TDS2000B Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service
Manual (077-0356-XX)
TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual
(071-1076-XX)
TDS200 Series Digital Real-Time Oscilloscopes Service Manual
(071-0492-XX)
TPS2000B Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual
(077-4447-XX)
TPS2000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes Service Manual
(071-1465-XX) or (077-0306-00)
Conventions
Refer to Command Syntax for information about command conventions. (See
page 2-1.)
This manual uses the following conventions:
References to the TDS2CMA Communications Extension Module include the
TDS2CM and TDS2CMAX modules.
Command descriptions list specific oscilloscopes series (and modules) when
commands are valid for only those products
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
vii
Preface
viii
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Getting Started
Getting Started
This manual contains information on how to remotely control and operate your
oscilloscope through communications protocol and commands.
NOTE. For TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
and the TDS1000B Series, you need to install the PC Communications software
from the CD that came with the oscilloscope on a PC before you connect the
oscilloscope USB Device port to the PC. Refer to the product user manual for
installation information.
For all products, you need to connect an appropriate cable between the
communications port on your oscilloscope and your PC.
The next table describes where the communications port is located on an extension
module or oscilloscope, and the function of the port.
Series
Port location
Port function
TDS200
TDS2CM, TDS2CMA,
or TDS2CMAX
Communications, TDS2MM
Math
RS-232, Centronics, GPIB
TDS1000/ TDS2000 1
TDS2CMA or TDS2CMAX
TDS2MEM Storage Memory
and Communications
RS-232, Centronics, GPIB
RS-232, Centronics,
CompactFlash
TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS1000B, and
TDS2000B 2
Back of oscilloscope
USB Device
TPS2000 and TPS2000B
Back of oscilloscope
1
2
GPIB with a TEK-USB-488
adapter
RS-232, Centronics
TDS1001 and TDS2004 are not compatible with the TDS2MEM module.
Install the PC Communications software from the CD that came with the oscilloscope first, and then refer to
your product user manual for information on installing the software. After the software is installed, connect
the oscilloscope to a PC.
Refer to your oscilloscope user manual for information on how to install, test, and
configure your oscilloscope and module.
NOTE. The firmware for the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS1000B, TDS2000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series
oscilloscopes includes communications, math, and storage memory functions.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
1-1
Getting Started
Series
TDS2CM,
TDS2CMA or
TDS2CMAX
TDS2MM
TDS2MEM
TEK-USB-488
TDS200
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes 1
No
TBS1000B/EDU, No
TBS1000,
TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS1000B or
TDS2000B
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
TDS1000 or
TDS2000
TPS2000 or
TPS2000B 2
1
2
TDS1001 and TDS2004 models are not compatible with the TDS2MEM module.
RS-232 is included in the oscilloscope firmware.
NOTE. If you use GPIB with the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, or TDS1000B Series, you can set a unique GPIB
address for the oscilloscope through the UTILITY ► Options ► GPIB Setup
option.
1-2
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Syntax and Commands
Command Syntax
You can control the oscilloscope through the GPIB, RS-232, or USB interface
using a large group of commands and queries.
This section describes the syntax these commands and queries use and the
conventions the oscilloscope uses to process them. The commands and queries
themselves are listed in the Command Descriptions section.
Command Syntax
Table 2-1: Oscilloscope communication protocol
Model or option
GPIB
RS-232
USB
TDS2CM,
TDS2CMA,
TDS2CMAX
Yes
Yes
No
TDS2MM
Yes
Yes
No
TDS2MEM
No
Yes
No
TDS1000 or
TDS2000
Yes 1
Yes 1 2
No
TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000,
TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS1000B, or
TDS2000B
Yes 3
No
Yes
TPS2000B,
TPS2000
No
Yes
No
1
2
3
Function available with a TDS2CM, TDS2CMA, or TDS2CMAX module.
Function available with a TDS2MEM module.
Function available with a TEK-USB-488 adapter.
You transmit commands to the oscilloscope using the enhanced American
Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) character encoding. Appendix
A contains a chart of the ASCII character set.
The Backus Naur Form (BNF) notation is used in this manual to describe
commands and queries.
Table 2-2: BNF notation
Symbol
<>
Meaning
::=
Is defined as
|
Exclusive OR
{}
Group; one element is required
Defined element
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-1
Command Syntax
Table 2-2: BNF notation (cont.)
Symbol
Meaning
[]
.. .
Optional; can be omitted
()
Comment
Previous element(s) may be repeated
Command and Query Structure
Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually simply called
commands and queries). Commands change oscilloscope settings or perform a
specific action. Queries cause the oscilloscope to return data and information
about its status.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the
command is the same as the set form except that it ends with a question mark. For
example, the set command ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe.
Not all commands have both a set and a query form; some commands are set
only and some are query only.
A few commands do both a set and query action. For example, the *CAL?
command runs a self-calibration program on the oscilloscope, then returns the
result of the calibration.
A command message is a command or query name, followed by any information
the oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query. Command messages
consist of five different element types.
Table 2-3: Command message elements
2-2
Symbol
Meaning
<Header>
The basic command name. If the header ends with a question mark,
the command is a query. The header may begin with a colon (:)
character; if the command is concatenated with other commands the
beginning colon is required. The beginning colon can never be used
with command headers beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic>
A header subfunction. Some command headers have only one
mnemonic. If a command header has multiple mnemonics, they are
always separated from each other by a colon (:) character.
<Argument>
A quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the header.
Not all commands have an argument, while other commands have
multiple arguments. Arguments are separated from the header by a
<Space>. Arguments are separated from each other by a <Comma>.
<Comma>
A single comma between arguments of multiple-argument commands.
It may optionally have white space characters before and after the
comma.
<Space>
A white space character between command header and argument. It
may optionally consist of multiple white space characters.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Syntax
The following figure shows the five command message elements.
Figure 2-1: Command message elements
Commands
Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or change one of
its settings. Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]
A command header is made up of one or more mnemonics arranged in a
hierarchical or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree
and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off of the previous one.
Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level. The
leading colon (:) always returns you to the base of the command tree.
Queries
Queries cause the oscilloscope to return information about its status or settings.
Queries have the structure:
[:]<Header>
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]
You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless
otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics
below the specified branch or level.
For example, MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? returns the measurement
units, while MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe? returns the measurement type
selected for the measurement, and MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? returns all the
measurement parameters for the specified measurement.
Headers in Query
Responses
You can control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as part of the query
response. Use the HEADer command to control this feature. If header is on, the
oscilloscope returns command headers as part of the query and formats the query
response as a valid set command. When header is off, the oscilloscope sends
back only the values in the response. This format can make it easier to parse and
extract the information from the response.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-3
Command Syntax
Table 2-4: Comparison of Header Off and Header On responses
Clearing the Output Queue
Query
Header Off response
Header On response
ACQuire:NUMAVg
64
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 64
CHx1:COUPling
DC
CH1:COUPLING DC
To clear the output queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new command or
query, send a Device Clear (DCL) from a GPIB host.
From an RS-232 host, send a break signal. The RS-232 interface responds by
returning the ASCII string "DCL."
From a USB host, send an INITIATE_CLEAR followed by
a CHECK_CLEAR_STATUS. The USB interface responds to
CHECK_CLEAR_STATUS with STATUS_SUCCESS when it is finished clearing
the output queue.
Command Entry
Follow these general rules when entering commands:
Enter commands in upper or lower case.
You can precede any command with white space characters. White space
characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through
09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
The oscilloscope ignores commands that consists of just a combination of
white space characters and line feeds.
Abbreviating Commands
You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands. These abbreviations are shown
in capital letters in the command listing in the Command Groups section and
Command Descriptions section. For example, the command ACQuire:NUMAvg
can be entered simply as ACQ:NUMA or acq:numa.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part
of query responses, you can also control whether the returned headers are
abbreviated or are full-length using the VERBose command.
Concatenating Commands
You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a
semicolon (;). The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in the order
received. When concatenating commands and queries you must follow these rules:
Completely different headers must be separated by both a semicolon and
by the beginning colon on all commands but the first. For example, the
commands TRIGger:MODe NORMal and ACQuire:NUMAVg 16 can be
concatenated into a single command:
2-4
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Syntax
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 16
If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last
mnemonic, you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the
beginning colon. For example, the commands ACQuire:MODe AVErage and
ACQuire:NUMAVg 16 could be concatenated into a single command:
ACQuire:MODe AVErage; NUMAVg 16
The longer version works equally well:
ACQuire:MODe AVErage;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 16
Never precede a star (*) command with a colon or semicolon:
ACQuire:MODe AVErage;*TRG
The oscilloscope processes commands that follow the star command as if
the star command was not there, so:
ACQuire:MODe AVErage;*TRG;NUMAVg 16
sets the acquisition mode to average and sets acquisition averaging to 16. The
*TRG command is ignored.
When you concatenate queries, the responses to all queries are combined into
a single response message. For example, if channel 1 coupling is set to DC
and the bandwidth is set to 20 MHz, the concatenated query:
CH1:COUPling;BANdwidth
returns CH1:COUPLING DC;:CH1:BANDWIDTH ON if header is on, or
DC;ON if header is off.
You can concatenate set commands and queries in the same message. For
example:
ACQuire:MODe AVErage;NUMAVg;STATE
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to average, queries the
number of acquisitions for averaging, and then queries the acquisition state.
The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands and queries in the order
it receives them.
Any query that returns arbitrary data, such as ID, must be the last query when
part of a concatenated command. If the query is not last, the oscilloscope
generates event message 440.
Here are some INVALID concatenation examples:
CH1:COUPling DC;ACQuire:NUMAVg 16 (missing colon before ACQuire)
CH1:COUPling DC;:BANDwidth ON (invalid colon before BANDwidth)
CH1:COUPling DC;:*TRG (invalid colon before a star (*) command)
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-5
Command Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition 0;MAIn:SCAle 1E-13 (levels of mnemonics are
different; either remove the second occurrence of MAIn:, or put HORizontal:
in front of MAIN:SCAle)
Message Terminators
This manual uses the term <EOM> (End of message) to represent a message
terminator.
GPIB End of Message (EOM) Terminators. GPIB EOM terminators can be the
END message (EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte), the ASCII
code for line feed (LF) sent as the last data byte, or both. The oscilloscope
always terminates messages with LF and EOI. White space is allowed before the
terminator; for example, CR LF is acceptable.
USB End of Message (EOM) Terminators. The EOM bit must be set in the USB
header of the last transfer of a command message
See the USB Test and Measurement Class Specification (USBTMC) section
3.2.1 for details. The oscilloscope terminates messages by setting the EOM
bit in the USB header of the last transfer of a message to the host (USBTMC
Specification section 3.3.1), and by terminating messages with a LF. White space
is allowed before the terminator; for example, CR LF is acceptable.
RS-232 End of Message Terminators. RS-232 EOM terminators can be a CR
(carriage return), LF (line feed), CRLF (carriage return followed by a line feed),
or LFCR (line feed followed by a carriage return)
When receiving, the oscilloscope accepts all four combinations as valid input
message terminators regardless of the currently selected terminator. When a
combination of multiple characters is selected (CRLF or LFCR), the oscilloscope
interprets the first character as the terminator and the second character as a null
command.
Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example, a
channel mnemonic could be CH2. You can use these mnemonics in the command
just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a CH1:VOLts command
and there is also a CH2:VOLts command. In the command descriptions, this
list of choices is abbreviated CH<x>.
Channel mnemonics. Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in
the header.
2-6
Symbol
Meaning
CH<x>
2-channel models: A channel specifier; <x> is 1 or 2.
4-channel models: A channel specifier; <x> is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Syntax
Reference Waveform
Mnemonics
Waveform Mnemonics
Cursor Position Mnemonic
Measurement Specifier
Mnemonics
Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the
header.
Symbol
Meaning
REF<x>
2-channel models: A reference waveform specifier; <x> is A or B.
4-channel models: A reference waveform specifier; <x> is A, B, C,
or D.
In some commands you can specify a waveform without regard to its type:
channel waveform, math waveform, or reference waveform. The "y" is the same
as "x" in Reference Waveform Mnemonics.
Symbol
Meaning
<wfm>
Can be CH<x>, MATH, or REF<y>
When the oscilloscope displays cursors, commands may specify which cursor
of the pair to use.
Symbol
Meaning
POSITION<x>
A cursor selector;<x> is 1 or 2.
Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the
header. The oscilloscope can display up to four (TDS200) or five (TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000,
TPS2000B, and TPS2000) or six (TBS1000B/EDU) automated measurements.
Symbol
Meaning
MEAS<x>
A measurement specifier; <x> is 1-4 (TDS200) or 1-5 (TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000,
TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000) or 1-6 (TBS1000B/EDU).
Argument Types
A command argument can be in one of several forms. The individual descriptions
of each command tell which argument types to use with that command.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-7
Command Syntax
Numeric Arguments
Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments.
Table 2-5: Types of numeric arguments
Symbol
Meaning
<NR1>
Signed integer value
<NR2>
Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3>
Floating point value with an exponent
The syntax shown is the data format that the oscilloscope returns in response to
a query. This format is also the preferred format when sending a command to
the oscilloscope.
When you enter an incorrect numeric argument, the oscilloscope automatically
forces the numeric argument to a correct value.
Table 2-6: Oscilloscope handling of incorrect numeric arguments
Quoted String Arguments
Argument value
Oscilloscope response
Numeric argument is less than lowest correct
value for that command
Sets the specified command to the lowest
correct value and executes the command
Numeric argument is greater than the highest
correct value for that command
Sets the specified command to the highest
correct value and executes the command
Numeric value is between two correct values
Rounds the entered value to the nearest
correct value and executes the command
Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is
simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes
("). For example:
"this is a quoted string"
2-8
Symbol
Meaning
<QString>
Quoted string of ASCII text
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Syntax
Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:
1. A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII character
set. (See page A-1, ASCII Code Chart.).
2. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string:
"this is a valid string"
3. You can mix quotation marks within a string if you follow the previous rule:
"this is an 'acceptable' string"
4. You can include a quote character within a string simply by repeating the
quote. For example,
"here is a "" mark"
5. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
6. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string with the
END message before the closing delimiter.
7. A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate
the string, but is treated as just another character in the string.
8. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000
characters.
Here are some examples of invalid strings:
"Invalid string argument' (quotes are not of the same type)
"test<EOI>" (termination character is embedded in the string)
Block Arguments
Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form.
Table 2-7: Parts of a block argument
Symbol
Meaning
<NZDig>
A nonzero digit character, in the range 1-9 Specifies the number of
<Dig> elements that follow
<Dig>
A digit character, in the range 0-9
<DChar>
A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through FF hexadecimal
(0 through 255 decimal)
<Block>
A block of data bytes, defined as:
<Block> := { #<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...] |
#0[<DChar>...]<terminator> }
The following figure shows an example of a block argument.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-9
Command Syntax
Figure 2-2: Block argument example
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together,
the <Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many <DChar>
elements follow.
#0 means that the <Block> is an indefinite length block. The <terminator> ends
the block. You should not use indefinite length blocks with RS-232, because there
is no way to include a <terminator> character as a <DChar> character.
The first occurrence of a <terminator> character signals the end of the block and
any subsequent <DChar> characters will be interpreted as a syntax error. With
the GPIB, the EOI line signals the last byte. With the USB, the EOM bit signals
the last byte.
2-10
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
This section lists the commands organized by functional group. The Command
Descriptions section lists all commands alphabetically.
The oscilloscope GPIB, USB, and RS-232 interfaces conform to Tektronix
standard codes and formats except where noted. The GPIB interface also
conforms to IEEE Std 488.2–1987 except where noted. The USB interface also
conforms to USB Test and Measurement Class, Subclass USB488 Specification,
except where noted.
Acquisition Commands
Acquisition commands affect the acquisition of waveforms. These commands
control mode, averaging, and single-waveform acquisition.
Table 2-8: Acquisition commands
Command
Description
ACQuire?
Return acquisition parameters
ACQuire:MODe
Set or query the acquisition mode
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Return the # of acquisitions obtained
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Set or query the number of acquisitions for
average
ACQuire:STATE
Start or stop the acquisition system
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Set or query the acquisition control
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands
Calibration and Diagnostic commands let you initiate the oscilloscope
self-calibration routines and examine the results of diagnostic tests.
Table 2-9: Calibration and Diagnostic commands
Command
Description
*CAL?
Perform an internal self-calibration and
return result status
CALibrate:ABOrt
Stop an in-progress factory calibration
CALibrate:CONTINUE
Perform the next step in the factory
calibration sequence
CALibrate:FACtory
Initialize the factory calibration sequence
CALibrate:INTERNAL
Perform an internal self-calibration
CALibrate:STATUS?
Return PASS or FAIL status of the last selfor factory-calibration operation
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-11
Command Groups
Table 2-9: Calibration and Diagnostic commands (cont.)
Command
Description
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Return diagnostic tests status
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
Return diagnostic test sequence results
ERRLOG:FIRST?
Returns first entry from error log
ERRLOG:NEXT?
Returns next entry from error log
Counter Commands (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
Counter commands provide control over the oscilloscope counter feature.
Table 2-10: Counter commands
Header
Description
COUNTERFreq?
Returns all counter frequency parameters
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
COUNTERFreq:CH1Level
Sets or queries the CH1 trigger level value
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
COUNTERFreq:CH1State
Sets or queries the CH1 counter to be on or
off (TBS1000B/EDU)
COUNTERFreq:CH1Value?
Returns the CH1 counter frequency value
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
COUNTERFreq:CH2Level
Sets or queries the CH2 trigger level value
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
COUNTERFreq:CH2State
Sets or queries the CH2 counter to be on or
off (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
COUNTERFreq:CH2Value?
Returns the CH2 counter frequency value
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
Cursor Commands
Cursor commands provide control over the oscilloscope cursor display and
readout.
Table 2-11: Cursor commands
2-12
Header
Description
CURSor?
Return cursor settings
Command
Set or query the cursors on or off; select
cursor type
CURSor:HBArs?
Return horizontal bar settings
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Return vertical distance between horizontal
bar cursors
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-11: Cursor commands (cont.)
Header
Description
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Set or query the position of a horizontal bar
cursor
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Query vertical scale units
CURSor:SELect:SOUrce
Select waveform
CURSor:VBArs?
Return vertical bar settings
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Return horizontal distance between cursors
CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa?
Return horizontal distance between cursors.
Same as CURSor:VBArs:DELTa
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?
Return the amplitude of the waveform at the
cursor position
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Set or query the position of a vertical bar
cursor
CURSor:VBArs:SLOPE?
Return the value of the on-screen dV/dt or
dI/dt measurement
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Set or query the vertical cursors to time or
frequency
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?
Return the vertical distance between cursors
Data Logging Commands (Available Only On TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C
Series Models)
Data logging commands let you direct the oscilloscope to automatically collect
data over a period of time.
Table 2-12: Data logging commands
Command
Description
DATALOGging?
Return all the data logging parameters
DATALOGging:DURAtion
Set the duration of the data logging
DATALOGging:SOURCE
Set up the data logging source
DATALOGging:STATE
Turn on or off the data logging feature
Display Commands
Display commands let you change the graticule style, displayed contrast, and
change other display attributes.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-13
Command Groups
Table 2-13: Display commands
2-14
Command
Description
DISplay?
Return display settings
DISplay:BACKLight
Sets the backlight value (TBS1000B/EDU
models only)
DISplay:BRIGHTness
Set or query the LCD display brightness
DISplay:CONTRast
Set or query the LCD display contrast
DISplay:FORMat
Set or query the YT or XY display
DISplay:INVert
Set or query the normal or inverted
monochrome display
DISplay:PERSistence
Set or query the accumulate time
DISplay:STYle
Set or query the waveform display style
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
FFT Commands (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
These commands provide control over the oscilloscope FFT feature.
Table 2-14: FFT commands
Command
Description
FFT?
Returns all FFT parameters (TBS1000B/EDU
models only)
FFT:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or queries the FFT horizontal display
position (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
FFT:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or queries the FFT horizontal zoom
factor (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
FFT:SOURce
Sets or queries the FFT source
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
FFT:SRCWFM
Sets or queries the FFT source waveform
display state (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
FFT:VERtical:POSition
Sets or queries the FFT vertical display
position (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
FFT:VERtical:SCAle
Sets or queries the FFT vertical zoom factor
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
FFT:WIN
Sets or queries the FFT window state
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
SELect:FFT
Sets or queries the FFT display state
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
File System Commands (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM Module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Only)
File system commands perform file management tasks on the CompactFlash
(CF) card of TPS2000 and TPS2000B oscilloscopes, and TDS models with a
TDS2MEM module; and on USB flash drives of TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
Table 2-15: File System commands
Command
Description
FILESystem?
Return the current working directory (CWD)
and CF card or USB flash drive free space
values
FILESystem:CWD
Set or query the current CF card or USB
flash drive directory
FILESystem:DELEte
Delete specified file on the CF card or USB
flash drive
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-15
Command Groups
Table 2-15: File System commands (cont.)
File System Conventions
Command
Description
FILESystem:DIR?
Return a list of files in current CF card or
USB flash drive directory
FILESystem:FORMat
Format the CF card or USB flash drive
FILESystem:FREESpace?
Return free space on the CF card or USB
flash drive
FILESystem:MKDir
Create a new directory on the CF card or
USB flash drive
FILESystem:REName
Assign new name to specified file on the CF
card or USB flash drive
FILESystem:RMDir
Delete specified directory
Use the following conventions when specifying file paths and file names:
The default folder (directory) for non-TBS1000B/EDU models is A:\.
The default folder (directory) for TBS1000B/EDU models is /usb0/.
File and folder names have a maximum of 11 characters; eight characters,
followed by a period, followed by up to three characters. This format is
referred to as 8.3 naming.
Wild card characters (*, %, ) are not valid characters in file or path names.
Lists the Windows-generated short file and folder names for long file or folder
names created on PC Windows operating systems.
2-16
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Hard Copy Commands
The hard copy commands let you control the format of hard copy output, and the
starting and stopping of hard copies.
NOTE. TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000. TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS1000B,
and TDS2000B oscilloscopes include PictBridge commands to provide additional
control of the hard copy format.
Table 2-16: Hard Copy commands
Command
Description
HARDCopy
Start or terminate hard copy
HARDCopy:BUTTON
Set or query the hard copy button function
For TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TPS2000, and TPS2000B set or query the
PRINT button function
HARDCopy:FORMat
Set or query the hard copy output format
HARDCopy:INKSaver
Set or query the hard copy ink saver option
HARDCopy:LAYout
Set or query the hard copy orientation
HARDCopy:PORT
Set or query the hard copy port for output:
RS232, GPIB, Centronics, or USB
Horizontal Commands
Horizontal commands control the time bases of the oscilloscope. You can set the
position and time per division of both the main and window time bases. You
can substitute SECdiv for SCAle in all appropriate horizontal commands. This
provides program compatibility with previous Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes.
Table 2-17: Horizontal commands
Command
Description
HORizontal?
Return horizontal settings
HORizontal:DELay?
Return all settings for the window time base.
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
HORizontal:DELay:POSition
Position window
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-17
Command Groups
Table 2-17: Horizontal commands (cont.)
Command
Description
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
Set or query the window time base
time/division
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
Same as HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
HORizontal:MAIn?
Return the main time base time/division
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition
Set or query the main time base trigger point
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Set or query the main time base time/division
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:POSition
Set or query the position of waveform to
display
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
Return waveform record length
HORizontal:SCAle
Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:SECdiv
Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:VIEW
Select view
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
Limit Test Commands (Available Only On TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C
Series Models)
Limit test commands direct the oscilloscope to monitor an active input signal
against a template and to output pass or fail results by judging whether the input
signal is within the bounds of the template.
Table 2-18: Limit test commands
Command
Description
LIMit?
Return all limit test parameters
LIMit:COMpare
Set or return the template against which to
compare the waveform acquired through the
specified channel.
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B models.
2-18
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-18: Limit test commands (cont.)
Command
Description
LIMit:RESUlt:FAIL?
Return the number of fail cases
LIMit:RESUlt:PASS?
Return the number of pass cases
LIMit:RESUlt:TOTAL?
Return the number of total cases tested
LIMit:SAVEIMAge
Set or return whether the oscilloscope should
save the screen image to a file on a limit test
failure event
LIMit:SAVEWFM
Set or return whether the oscilloscope should
save the waveform to a file on a limit test
failure event
LIMit:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source channel for the
waveform currently being compared to the
test template
LIMit:STATE
Turn limit testing on or off, or return whether
limit testing is in effect
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe
Set or restore the mode for the limit test stop
after feature
LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe
Set or return the limit test stop after time
setting
LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation
Set or return the limit test stop after violation
setting
LIMit:STOPAfter:WAVEform
Set or return the setting for the limit test stop
after waveform function
LIMit:TEMPLate
Create and store the limit test template
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination
Set or return the destination reference
waveform.
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B models.
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
Set or return the limit test source channel or
reference waveform
LIMit:TEMPlate:DUALSOUrce
Sets the dual template waveform source.
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B models.
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVEFIRSource
Saves the first template source data
temporarily
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B models.
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESECSource
Saves the second template source data
temporarily
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B models.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-19
Command Groups
Table 2-18: Limit test commands (cont.)
Command
Description
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESOUrce
Saves the template source data for single
waveform templates
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B models.
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal
Set or return the amount by which the
source waveform is varied horizontally when
creating the destination template waveform
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
Set or return the amount by which the source
waveform is varied vertically when creating
the destination template waveform
Math Commands
Math commands provide math function definition.
Table 2-19: Math commands
Command
Description
MATH?
Query the definition for the math waveform
MATH:DEFINE
Set or query the math waveform definition
MATH:FFT?
Return all math FFT parameters.
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition
Set or query the FFT horizontal display
position
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle
Set or query the FFT horizontal zoom factor
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition
Set or query the FFT vertical display position.
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
2-20
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-19: Math commands (cont.)
Command
Description
MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle
Set or query the FFT vertical zoom factor
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
MATH:VERtical?
Return all math vertical waveform parameters
MATH:VERtical:POSition
Set or query the math waveform display
position
MATH:VERtical:SCAle
Set or query the math waveform display
scale
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-21
Command Groups
Measurement Commands
Measurement commands control the automated measurement system. The
oscilloscope can display up to four (TDS200) or five (TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000) or six (TBS1000B/EDU) automated measurements. In the commands,
these measurement readouts are named MEAS<x>, where <x> can be 1, 2, 3, or
4 (or 5 for TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000) (or 6 for the TBS1000B/EDU).
The best method for taking measurements over the computer interface is to use the
MEASUREMENT:IMMED commands and queries. The immediate measurement
has no front-panel equivalent, and the oscilloscope never displays immediate
measurements.
Because they are computed only when they are requested, immediate
measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed measurements.
Use the VALue? query to obtain measurement results of either displayed or
immediate measurements.
Several measurement commands set and query measurement parameters. You
can assign some parameters, such as waveform sources, differently for each
measurement readout.
Table 2-20: Measurement commands
Command
Description
MEASUrement?
Return all measurement parameters
MEASUrement:CLEARSNAPSHOT
Clears the existing snapshot results and
removes the snapshot window
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B/EDU models.
MEASUrement:GATing
Sets or returns the measurement gating
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B/EDU models.
2-22
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Return immediate measurement parameters
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce[1]
Set or query the channel for immediate
measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Set or query the channel for
two-source immediate measurements
(TPS2000B/TPS2000 with Power Analysis
Module only)
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Set or query the immediate measurement to
be taken
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Return the immediate measurement units
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Return the immediate measurement result
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-20: Measurement commands (cont.)
Command
Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Return parameters on the periodic
measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce
Set or query the channel to take the periodic
measurement from
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Set or query the type of periodic measurement
to be taken
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Return the units for periodic measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Return periodic measurement results
MEASUrement:SNAPSHOT
Sets the measurement snapshot
measurements
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B/EDU models.
MEASUrement:SNAPSOUrce
Sets or returns the snapshot source
NOTE. This command is applicable
only to TBS1000B/EDU models.
Miscellaneous Commands
Miscellaneous commands are a group of commands that do not fit into any other
category.
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2-1987 devices on the
GPIB or USB bus, and the device on the RS-232 interface. These commands and
queries are defined by IEEE Std. 488.2-1987 and Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats 1989 and begin with an asterisk (*) character.
Table 2-21: Miscellaneous commands
Command
Description
AUTORange
Return all autorange parameters
AUTORange:SETTings
Set or query the which parameters autorange
can adjust
AUTORange:STATE
Set or query the autorange to on or off
AUTOSet
Automatic oscilloscope setup
AUTOSet:ENABLE
Allows educators to disable or enable the
Autorange and Autoset functions. 1
NOTE. This command is not
applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
AUTOSet:SIGNAL?
Return the type of signal found by autoset
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-23
Command Groups
Table 2-21: Miscellaneous commands (cont.)
Command
Description
AUTOSet:VIEW
Set or query the Autoset view
DATE
Set or query the date value
*DDT
Set or query the group execute trigger (GET)
FACtory
Reset to factory default
HDR
Same as HEADer
HEADer
Set or query the command header
ID?
Return identification information
*IDN?
Return identification information
LANGuage
Set or query the language for display
messages
LOCk
Lock front panel (local lockout)
*LRN?
Query device settings
REM
No action; remark only
*RST
Reset
SET?
Same as *LRN
TIMe
Set or query the time value
*TRG
Perform Group Execute Trigger (GET)
*TST?
Return self-test results
UNLock
Unlock front panel (local lockout)
VERBose
Return full command name or minimum
spellings with query
1
AUTOSet: ENABLE can be manually set from the Service Diag menu. To access the service diagnostics
menu, refer to your product service manual.
PictBridge Commands (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Only)
The PictBridge commands let you control the format of the hard copy on the
PictBridge compatible printer.
NOTE. The HARDCopy:BUTTON, HARDCopy:INKSaver, and
HARDCopy:LAYOUT commands apply to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
2-24
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-22: PictBridge commands
Command
Description
PICTBridge:DEF
Set the next six options to default
PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE
Set or query the paper size
PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE
Set or query the image size
PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE
Set or query the paper type
PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL
Set or query the print quality
PICTBridge:DATEPRINT
Set or query the date print
PICTBridge:IDPRINT
Set or query the ID print
Power and Battery-Related Commands (TPS2000B and TPS2000 Only)
Power and Battery-Related commands provide battery management functions to a
TPS2000B and TPS2000 oscilloscope.
Table 2-23: Power and Battery-Related commands (TPS2000B and TPS2000 only)
Command
Description
POWer?
Return all power parameters
POWer:AC:PRESENt?
Return whether the oscilloscope is being
powered by battery or AC
POWer:BATTERY<x>:GASgauge?
Return the charge remaining in battery x
POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS?
Return status for battery x
POWer:BATTERIES:TIME?
Return the time remaining in both batteries
POWer:BUTTONLIGHT
Turn the lighted front-panel buttons on and
off
Power Measurement (TPS2000B/TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis
Application Key Installed Only)
Power Measurement commands provide power measurements to a
TPS2000B/TPS2000 oscilloscope with the TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis
application software key installed.
Table 2-24: Power Measurement commands (TPS2000B/TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1
only)
Command
Description
HARmonics?
Return all harmonic parameters
HARmonics:ENABle
Set or query the harmonics menu on and off
HARmonics:FREquency?
Return the frequency of the selected
harmonic
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-25
Command Groups
Table 2-24: Power Measurement commands (TPS2000B/TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1
only) (cont.)
2-26
Command
Description
HARmonics:HRMS?
Return the frequency of the selected
harmonic
HARmonics:PERCent?
Return the amplitude of the selected
harmonic as a percent of the fundamental
HARmonics:PHAse?
Return the phase of the selected harmonic,
in degrees, relative to the fundamental
HARmonics:RMS?
Return the amplitude of the harmonics
source in RMS units. This may be Vrms or Irms
depending on the type of source waveform
HARmonics:SAVe
Set the file name and path to save harmonic
data
HARmonics:SELect
Set or query the selected harmonic
HARmonics:SETUp
Set or query the operating mode for
harmonics measurements commands
HARmonics:SHOW
Set or query the specified harmonics
HARmonics:SOUrce
Set or query the source in the harmonics
menu
HARmonics:THDF?
Query the total harmonic distortion of the
waveform as percent of fundamental
HARmonics:THDR?
Query the total harmonic distortion of the
waveform as % of input Vrms
POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces
Sets or query the power analysis sources
SWLoss?
Return switching loss measurement settings
SWLoss:ACQuire
Set or query the type of acquisition to use for
Switching Loss commands
SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION?
Return the power loss of the device under
test when the device is conducting
SWLoss:AVErage:N?
Return the number of measurements used to
calculate the averaged value for switching
loss commands
SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL?
Return the sum of the turn-on, turn-off, and
conduction switching losses for an Average
measurement
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF?
Return the power loss of the device under
test when the device is transitioning from on
to off
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON?
Return the power loss of the device under
test when the device is transitioning from off
to on
SWLoss:ENABLe
Set or query switching loss measurements
on or off
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-24: Power Measurement commands (TPS2000B/TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1
only) (cont.)
Command
Description
SWLoss:LEVELS
Return oscilloscope Switching Loss
Measurement settings to factory default
(SWLoss:TONSTART, SWLoss:TONEND,
SWLoss:TOFFSTART, SWLoss:TOFFEND
only)
SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION?
Return the Conduction Loss for a switching
loss measurement
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX
Set or query which measurement to return
for a SWLoss:LOG command
SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?
Return the Total Loss for a switching loss
measurement
SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF?
Return the Turn-Off Loss for a switching loss
measurement
SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?
Return the Turn-On Loss for a switching loss
measurement
SWLoss:SAVE
Saves the Switching Loss Measurements
SWLoss:SOURCES
Set or query the input sources for Switching
Loss Measurements
SWLoss:STOPAfter
Set or query the number of acquisitions used
for Switching Loss Measurements
SWLoss:TOFFEND
Set or query a level on the first falling edge
of the current waveform that occurs after the
turn-off starts
SWLoss:TONEND
Set or query a level on the first rising edge of
the voltage waveform that occurs after the
first falling edge
SWLoss:TOFFSTART
Set or query a level on the falling edge of
the voltage waveform that defines where the
beginning of the switching loss measurement
ends
SWLoss:TONSTART
Set or query a level on the falling edge of
the voltage waveform that defines where the
switching loss measurement begins
SWLoss:UNITs
Set or query the units for Switching Loss
Measurement
SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION?
Return the power loss of the device under
test when the device is conducting in its on
state
SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL?
Return the sum of the turn-on, turn-off, and
conduction switching losses
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-27
Command Groups
Table 2-24: Power Measurement commands (TPS2000B/TPS2000 with TPS2PWR1
only) (cont.)
Command
Description
SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF?
Return the power loss of the device under
test when the device is transitioning between
its on and off state
SWLoss:VALue:TURNON?
Return the power loss of the device under
test when the device is transitioning between
its off and on state display
SWLoss:VSAT
Set or query the saturation voltage for the
device under test
WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce
Set or query the source for Waveform
Analysis commands
RS-232 Commands (TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Only)
RS-232 commands allow you to set or query the parameters that control the
RS-232 port.
Table 2-25: RS-232 commands
Command
Description
RS232?
Query RS232 parameters
RS232:BAUd
Set or query the baud rate
RS232:HARDFlagging
Set or query the hard flagging
RS232:PARity
Set or query the parity type
RS232:SOFTFlagging
Set or query the soft flagging
RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator
Set or query the end-of-line terminator
Only certain oscilloscope models are compatible with RS-232. (See Table 2-1
on page 2-1.)
Save and Recall Commands
Save and Recall commands allow you to store and retrieve internal waveforms
and settings. When you "save a setting," you save most of the settings of the
oscilloscope. When you then "recall a setting," the oscilloscope restores itself to
the state it was in when you saved that setting.
To display a saved waveform, use the SELect:<wfm> command.
2-28
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-26: Save and Recall commands
Command
Description
*RCL
Recall setting
RECAll:SETUp
Recall saved oscilloscope setting
RECAll:WAVEForm
Recall saved waveform
*SAV
Save oscilloscope setting
SAVe:IMAge
Save screen image to file
SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat
Set screen image file format
SAVe:SETUp
Save oscilloscope setting
SAVe:WAVEform
Save waveform
Status and Error Commands
Status and error commands let you determine the status of the oscilloscope and
control events.
Several commands and queries are common to all devices on the GPIB or USB
bus. These commands and queries are defined by IEEE Std. 488.2-1987 and Tek
Standard Codes and Formats 1989, and begin with an asterisk (*) character.
Table 2-27: Status and Error commands
Command
Description
ALLEv?
Return all events
BUSY?
Return oscilloscope busy status
*CLS
Clear status
DESE
Set or query the device event status enable
*ESE
Set or query the standard event status
enable
*ESR?
Return standard event status register; this
is the usual way to determine whether a set
command executed without error
EVENT?
Return event code
EVMsg?
Return event message
EVQty?
Return number of events in queue
*OPC
Set or query the operation complete
*PSC
Set or query the power-on status clear
*SRE
Set or query the service request enable
*STB?
Read status byte
*WAI
Wait to continue
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-29
Command Groups
Trend Plot Commands (TBS1000B models only)
Table 2-28: Trend plot commands
Command
Description
TRENDPLOT?
Returns all trend plot parameters (TBS1000B
models only)
TRENDPLOT:STATE
Returns the running state of the trend plot
(TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TIME
Queries the elapsed time (TbS1000B models
only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:AVG?
Queries the current statistical average value
(TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MAX?
Queries the current statistical maximum
value (TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MIN?
Queries the current statistical minimum value
(TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALE?
Queries the current scale of per div
(TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMAX?
Queries the maximum value you can plot on
the display (TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMIN?
Queries the minimum value you can plot on
the display (TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SOURCE
Sets or returns the trend plot source
(TBS1000B models only)
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:TYPe
Sets or returns the trend plot type (TBS1000B
models only)
Trigger Commands
Trigger commands control all aspects of oscilloscope triggering.
The three types of triggers are edge, pulse width, and video. Edge triggering is the
default type. Edge triggering lets you acquire a waveform when the signal passes
through a voltage level of your choosing. Pulse width triggering lets you trigger
on normal or aberrant pulses. Video triggering adds the capability of triggering on
video fields and lines.
Table 2-29: Trigger commands
2-30
Command
Description
TRIGger
Force trigger event
TRIGger:MAIn
Set main trigger level to 50%; Query returns
main trigger settings
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?
Return edge trigger settings
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-29: Trigger commands (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling
Set or query the edge trigger coupling
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe
Set or query the edge trigger slope
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce
Set or query the edge trigger source
TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency?
Return trigger frequency value
(TBS1000B/EDU,TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS10000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 only)
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?
Return trigger holdoff value
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue
Set or query the trigger holdoff value
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel
Set or query the trigger level
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe
Set or query the trigger mode
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?
Return pulse trigger settings
(TBS1000B/EDU,TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 only)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce
Set or query the pulse trigger source
(TBS1000B/EDU,TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 only)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?
Return pulse trigger width parameters
(TBS1000B/EDU,TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 only)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
Set or query the pulse trigger
polarity(TBS1000B/EDU,TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000,
TPS2000B, and TPS2000 only)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN
Set or query the pulse trigger when
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth
Set or query the pulse trigger width
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe
Set or query the main trigger type
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?
Query video trigger parameters
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE
Set or query the video trigger line
(TBS1000B/EDU,TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 only)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity
Set or query the video trigger polarity
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce
Set or query the video trigger source
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-31
Command Groups
Table 2-29: Trigger commands (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANDard
Set or query the video trigger standard
(TBS1000B/EDU,TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 only)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC
Set or query the video trigger sync
TRIGger:STATE?
Return trigger system status
Vertical Commands
Vertical commands control the attributes of the channels. The SELect:<wfm>
command also displays a specified waveform or removes it from the display.
Table 2-30: Vertical commands
Command
Description
CH<x>?
Return vertical parameters
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Set or query the channel bandwidth
CH<x>:COUPling
Set or query the channel coupling
CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe
Set or query the scale settings for current
probes (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 only)
CH<x>:INVert
Set or query the channel invert 1
CH<x>:POSition
Set or query the channel position
CH<x>:PRObe
Set or query the channel probe parameters
CH<x>:SCAle
Set or query the channel volts/div
CH<x>:VOLts
Same as CH<x>:SCAle
CH<x>:YUNit
Set or query the units of the specified channel
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TPS2000B, and TPS2000 only)
SELect?
Controls the display of waveforms
SELect:<wfm>
Set or query the waveform display state
1
All oscilloscope, firmware version, and module combinations except TDS210 and TDS220 with both a firmware
version below V 2.00 and a TDS2CMA communications module installed.
Waveform Commands
Waveform commands let you transfer waveform data points to and from the
oscilloscope. Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a
2-32
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
waveform. One data value usually represents one data point in the waveform
record. When working with peak-detect waveforms, each data value is either the
min or max of a min/max pair. Before you can transfer waveform data, you must
specify the data format and waveform locations.
Refer to the text following this table for more information about waveform
commands.
Table 2-31: Waveform commands
Command
Description
CURVe
Transfer waveform data to or from the
oscilloscope
DATa
Set or query the waveform data format and
location
DATa:DESTination
Set or query the destination for waveforms
sent to the oscilloscope
DATa:ENCdg
Set or query the waveform data encoding
method
DATa:SOUrce
Set or query the source of CURVe? data
DATa:STARt
Set or query the starting point in waveform
transfer
DATa:STOP
Set or query the ending point in waveform
transfer
DATa:TARget
Same as DATa:DESTination
DATa:WIDth
Set or query the byte width of waveform
points
WAVFrm?
Return waveform preamble and curve data
WFMPre?
Return waveform preamble
WFMPre:<wfm>?
Return waveform formatting data
WFMPre:BIT_Nr
Set or query the preamble bit width of
waveform points
WFMPre:BN_Fmt
Set or query the preamble binary encoding
type
WFMPre:BYT_Nr
Set or query the preamble byte width of
waveform points
WFMPre:BYT_Or
Set or query the preamble byte order of
waveform points
WFMPre:ENCdg
Set or query the preamble encoding method
WFMPre:NR_Pt?
Query the number of points in the curve
transfer
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?
Return the number of points in the transmitted
waveform record
WFMPre:PT_Fmt
Set or query the format of curve points
WFMPre:PT_Off
Query the trigger offset
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-33
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Waveform commands (cont.)
Waveform Data Formats
Command
Description
WFMPre:WFId?
Query the waveform identifier
WFMPre:XINcr
Set or query the horizontal sampling interval
WFMPre:XUNit
Set or query the horizontal units
WFMPre:XZEro
Set or query the time of first data point in
waveform
WFMPre:YMUlt
Set or query the vertical scale factor
WFMPre:YOFf
Set or query the vertical position
WFMPre:YUNit
Set or query the vertical units
WFMPre:YZEro
Set or query the waveform conversion factor
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, TPS2000,
and TDS200 with TDS2MM module only.
Internally, the oscilloscope uses one 8-bit data byte to represent each waveform
data point, regardless of the acquisition mode.
The DATa:WIDth command lets you specify the number of bytes per data point
when transferring data to and from an oscilloscope. This provides compatibility
with other digitizing oscilloscopes.
When DATa:WIDth is set to two:
If sending data, the oscilloscope multiplies each point by 256; the most
significant byte then has meaningful data and the least significant byte is 0
If receiving data, the oscilloscope truncates the data (divides by 256) and
saves the most significant byte
NOTE. The oscilloscopes uses these methods to handle waveforms transmitted in
ASCII or binary format.
The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format.
Use the DATa:ENCdg command to specify one of the following formats:
ASCII data is represented by signed integer values. The range of values
depends on the byte width specified. One-byte-wide data ranges from -128 to
127. Two-byte-wide data ranges from -32768 to 32767.
Each data value requires two to seven characters. This includes one character
for the minus sign if the value is negative, one to five ASCII characters for the
waveform value, and a comma to separate data points.
An example of an ASCII waveform data string follows:
2-34
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,-109,-107,
-106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80
Binary data can be represented by signed integer or positive integer values.
The range of the values depends on the byte width specified.
Table 2-32: Binary data ranges
Byte width
Signed integer range
Positive integer range
1
-128 to 127
0 to 255
2
-32,768 to 32,767
0 to 65,535
The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are
transferred giving a total of four binary formats: RIBinary, RPBinary, SRIbinary,
and SRPbinary.
RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first, and
RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first.
SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respectively but
use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred first. The
byte order is ignored when DATa:WIDth is set to 1.
Waveform Data Record
You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can transfer a
part of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record. The DATa:STARt
and DATa:STOP commands let you specify the first and last data points of the
waveform record.
When transferring data into the oscilloscope you must specify the location of the
first data point within the waveform record. For example, when DATa:STARt is
set to 1, data points will be stored starting with the first point in the record, and
when DATa:STARt is set to 500, data will be stored starting at the 500th point in
the record. The oscilloscope ignores DATa:STOP when reading in data as the
oscilloscope will stop reading data when there is no more data to read or when it
has reached 2500 data points.
You must specify the first and last data points in the waveform record when
transferring data from the oscilloscope to an external device. Setting DATa:STARt
to 1 and DATa:STOP to 2500 always sends the entire waveform, regardless of
the acquisition mode.
Waveform Data Locations
and Memory Allocation
The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the location of the data when transferring
waveforms from the oscilloscope. You can transfer one waveform at a time.
You can transfer only one waveform into the oscilloscope at a time. Each
waveform is stored in one of two stored waveform locations for 2-channel models
or one of four stored waveform locations for 4-channel models. You specify the
stored waveform location with the DATa:DESTination command.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-35
Command Groups
NOTE. The oscilloscope stores waveforms that are ≤2500 data points long. The
oscilloscope truncates waveforms longer than 2500 data points.
Waveform Preamble
Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that
contains information such as the horizontal scale, vertical scale, and other settings
in place when the waveform was created. Refer to the WFMPre? commands for
more information about the waveform preamble.
Scaling Waveform Data
Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can convert the data
points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform
preamble.
Transferring Waveform
Data
Data transfer times depend on data format, data width, and the speed of the
controller. (See page 4-1, Programming Examples.)
From the oscilloscope. To transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to an
external controller, follow these steps:
1. Use the DATa:SOUrce command to select the waveform source.
2. Use the DATa:ENCdg command to specify the waveform data format.
3. Use the DATa:WIDth command to specify the number of bytes per data point.
4. Use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands to specify the part of the
waveform that you want to transfer.
5. Use the WFMPre? command to transfer waveform preamble information.
6. Use the CURVe command to transfer waveform data.
To the oscilloscope. To transfer waveform data to an oscilloscope waveform
storage location, follow these steps:
1. Use the DATa:DESTination command to specify the stored waveform location.
2. Use the DATa:ENCdg command to specify the waveform data format.
3. Use the DATa:WIDth command to specify the number of bytes per data point.
4. Use the DATa:STARt command to specify the first data point in the waveform
record.
5. Use the WFMPre? command to transfer waveform preamble information.
6. Use the CURVe command to transfer waveform data.
Zoom Commands (TBS1000B/EDU models only)
These commands support the zoom feature.
2-36
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Groups
Table 2-33: Zoom commands
Command
Description
ZOOM?
Returns all zoom parameters (TBS1000B
models only)
ZOOM:FACtor
Sets or queries the zoom factor of a particular
zoom box (TBS1000B models only)
ZOOM:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or queries the horizontal position of
a particular zoom box (TBS1000B/EDU
models only)
ZOOM:HORizontal:SCAle?
Queries the zoom window current time scale
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
ZOOM:MODE
Sets or queries the zoom mode as
SCAle/POSition (TBS1000B/EDU models
only)
ZOOM:STATE
Sets or queries the zoom on/off state
(TBS1000B/EDU models only)
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-37
Command Groups
2-38
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Commands either set or query oscilloscope values. Some commands both set and
query, some only set, and some only query.
Manual Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
No query form exists for commands identified as "No Query Form"
A question mark (?) appended to the command and "Query Only" indicates
query-only commands
Headers,, mnemonics, and arguments are fully spelled out, with the minimal
spelling shown in upper case. For example, to use the abbreviated form of the
ACQuire:MODe command, just type ACQ:MOD
The syntax of some commands varies, depending on the model of oscilloscope
and extension module you use; differences are noted
Command descriptions list specific oscilloscopes series (and module) when
commands are valid for only those products
NOTE. While Trigger View is active (when you push the front-panel TRIG VIEW
button), the oscilloscope ignores the set form of most commands. If you send a
command at this time, the oscilloscope generates execution error 221 (Settings
conflict).
ACQuire? (Query Only)
Returns current acquisition settings.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire?
Returns
Examples
Returns current acquisition settings.
ACQUIRE? might return the following string for the current acquisition:
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-39
Command Descriptions
ACQuire:MODe
Sets or queries the oscilloscope acquisition mode. This affects all live waveforms
and is equivalent to setting the Mode option in the Acquire menu.
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals.
Each acquisition interval represents a time duration that is determined by the
horizontal scale (time per division).
The oscilloscope sampling system can operate at a rate greater than that indicated
by the horizontal scale. Therefore, an acquisition interval can include more than
one sample.
The acquisition mode, which you set using this ACQuire:MODe command,
determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the
many data samples.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | PEAKdetect | AVErage }
ACQuire:MODe?
Arguments
SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value
that was taken during the acquisition interval. The waveform data has 8 bits of
precision in all acquisition modes. You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe?
query, but the lower-order 8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple is the default mode.
PEAKdetect specifies the display of the high-low range of the samples taken from
a single waveform acquisition. The oscilloscope displays the high-low range as a
vertical range that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the
acquisition interval. PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing.
AVErage specifies averaging mode, where the resulting waveform shows an
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The
number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is
set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
Examples
ACQUIRE:MODE PEAKDETECT displays a vertical area representing the range of
the highest to lowest value of the acquired signal.
ACQUIRE:MODE? might return SAMPLE.
2-40
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)
Indicates the number of acquisitions that have taken place since starting
oscilloscope acquisition. The maximum number of acquisitions that can be
counted is 231-1. This value is reset to zero when you change most Acquisition,
Horizontal, Vertical, or Trigger arguments that affect the waveform except for
the following:
Changing the trigger level or trigger holdoff when in Sample or Peak Detect
mode does not reset the value
NOTE. Any change made when in Average mode aborts the acquisition and resets
ACQuire:NUMACq to zero.
TDS200: changing the vertical position does not reset the value
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series: if the
Trigger mode is set to Auto, and the Horizontal Scale is 10 ms/div or slower,
changing the vertical position does not reset the value
NOTE. In Scan mode, ACQuire:NUMACq? always returns zero.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Returns
Examples
<NR1>
ACQUIRE:NUMACQ? might return 350, indicating that 350 acquisitions took place
since an ACQuire:STATE RUN command was executed.
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Sets the number of oscilloscope waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged
waveform. This command is equivalent to setting the Averages option in the
Acquire menu.
Group
Acquisition
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-41
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
<NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions. Correct values are 4, 16, 64,
and 128.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16 specifies that an averaged waveform will show the result of
combining 16 separately acquired waveforms.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG? might return 64, indicating that there are 64 acquisitions
specified for averaging.
ACQuire:STATE
Starts or stops oscilloscope acquisitions. This command is the equivalent of
pressing the front-panel RUN/STOP button. If ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence, other signal events may also stop acquisition.
NOTE. The best way to determine when a single sequence acquisition is complete
is to use *OPC rather than ACQuire:STATE.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:STATE { OFF | ON | RUN | STOP | <NR1> }
ACQuire:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
*OPC
OFF|STOP|<NR1> = 0 stops acquisitions.
ON|RUN|<NR1> ≠ 0 starts acquisition and display of waveforms. If the command
was issued in the middle of an acquisition sequence (for instance averaging),
RUN restarts the sequence, discarding any data accumulated before the STOP. It
also resets the number of acquisitions.
Examples
ACQUIRE:STATE RUN starts acquisition of waveform data and resets the number
of acquisitions count (NUMACq) to zero.
ACQUIRE:STATE? returns 0 or 1, depending on whether the acquisition system is
running.
2-42
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Tells the oscilloscope when to stop taking acquisitions.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:STOPAfter { RUNSTop | SEQuence}
ACQuire:STOPAfter?
Arguments
RUNSTop specifies that the run and stop states should be determined by pressing
the front-panel RUN/STOP button or issuing the ACQuire:STATE command.
SEQuence specifies "single sequence" operation, where the oscilloscope stops
after it has acquired enough waveforms to satisfy the conditions of the acquisition
mode. For example, if the acquisition mode is set to sample, the oscilloscope
stops after digitizing a waveform from a single trigger event. However, if the
acquisition mode is set to average 64 waveforms, then the oscilloscope stops
only after acquiring all 64 waveforms.
The ACQuire:STATE command and the front-panel RUN/STOP button also stop
acquisitions when the oscilloscope is in single sequence mode.
Examples
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP sets the oscilloscope to stop the acquisition
when you press the front-panel RUN/STOP button.
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER? might return SEQUENCE.
ALLEv? (Query Only)
Causes the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages, and removes the
returned events from the Event Queue. The messages are separated by commas.
Use the *ESR? query to enable the events to be returned. Refer to the Status and
Events section for a complete description of how to use these registers. This
command is similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the oscilloscope.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
ALLEv?
Related Commands
Returns
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, EVQty?, *SRE, *STB?
The event code and message in the following format:
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-43
Command Descriptions
<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Comma><Event
Code><Comma><QString>...]
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
<Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a
command error is detected by the oscilloscope. As much of the command is
returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the <Message>
and <Command> strings combined. The command string is right-justified.
Examples
ALLEV? might return the following string: ALLEV 2225,"MEASUREMENT
ERROR, NO WAVEFORM TO MEASURE; ",420,"QUERY UNTERMINATED; "
AUTORange (No Query Form)
Returns current AUTORange settings.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTORange
Examples
AUTORANGE? might return AUTORANGE:SETTINGS BOTH;STATE 1, indicating
that Autorange is active and adjusting both the horizontal and vertical settings.
AUTORange:STATE
Toggles Autorange off and on.
Conditions
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTORange:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
AUTORange:STATE?
Related Commands
2-44
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
AUTORange:SETTings
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
OFF deactivates the Autorange feature.
ON activates the Autorange feature.
<NR1> = 0 deactivates the Autorange feature.
<NR1> ≠ 0 activates the Autorange feature.
Examples
AUTORANGE:STATE ON starts the Autorange function.
AUTORANGE:STATE? returns 0 or 1, depending on whether the Autorange
function is on.
AUTORange:SETTings
Controls the parameters that the Autorange function can adjust. It is equivalent to
the option buttons in the Autorange menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTORange:SETTings { HORizontal | VERTical | BOTH }
AUTORange:SETTings?
Related Commands
Arguments
AUTORange:STATE
HORizontal allows Autorange to adjust the horizontal, but not vertical, settings.
VERTical allows Autorange to adjust the vertical, but not horizontal, settings.
BOTH allows Autorange to adjust both the horizontal and vertical settings.
Examples
AUTORANGE:SETTINGS VERTICAL turns on the Autorange vertical settings.
AUTORANGE:SETTINGS? might return VERTICAL, indicating that Autorange
will only adjust the vertical settings.
AUTOSet (No Query Form)
Causes the oscilloscope to adjust its vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls to
display a stable waveform. This command is equivalent to pushing the front-panel
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-45
Command Descriptions
AUTOSET button. For a detailed description of the Autoset function, refer to
the user manual for your oscilloscope.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTOSet EXECute
Arguments
EXECute invokes Autoset.
AUTOSet:ENABLE
Allows educators to disable or enable the Autorange and Autoset functions. The
function can be manually set from the Service Diag menu. To access the menu,
refer to the your product service manual.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only. It is not applicable to TBS1000B/EDU
models.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTOSet:ENABLE
AUTOSet:SIGNAL? (Query Only)
Returns the type of signal discovered by the most recent execution of Autoset.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTOSet:SIGNAL?
Returns
LEVEL if the oscilloscope discovered a DC level.
SINE if the oscilloscope discovered a sine-like waveform.
SQUARE if the oscilloscope discovered a square-like waveform.
VIDPAL if the oscilloscope discovered a PAL or SECAM standard video signal.
VIDNTSC if the oscilloscope discovered an NTSC standard video signal.
2-46
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
OTHER if the oscilloscope was unable to classify the signal.
NONE if the AUTOSET menu is not displayed.
AUTOSet:VIEW (No Query Form)
If the current menu is not the Autoset menu, or if the view is not valid for the
detected waveform, the set command causes the oscilloscope to generate error
221 (Settings conflict).
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTOSet:VIEW { MULTICYcle | SINGLECYcle | FFT | RISINGedge |
FALLINGedge | FIELD | ODD | EVEN | LINE | LINENum | DCLIne |
DEFault | NONE }
Arguments
MULTICYcle displays a sine or square wave of several cycles. Default for
sine-like and square-like signals.
SINGLECYcle displays a sine or square wave of approximately one cycle.
FFT displays the FFT of a sine wave.
RISING displays the rising edge of a square wave.
FALLING displays the falling edge of a square wave.
FIELD displays a video signal synchronized on all fields. This is the default for
video signals.
ODD displays a video signal synchronized on odd fields.
EVEN displays a video signal synchronized on even fields.
LINE displays a video signal synchronized on all lines.
LINENum displays a video signal synchronized on the specified line number.
DCLIne returns a query response when the oscilloscope finds a DC level.
DEFault returns a query response when the oscilloscope cannot determine the
signal type.
NONE returns a query response when the AUTOSET menu is not displayed. Set is
ignored.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-47
Command Descriptions
Examples
AUTOSET:VIEW EVEN will display video signals synchronized on even fields
when operated in autoset mode.
BUSY? (Query Only)
Returns the status of the oscilloscope. This command allows you to synchronize
the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program. (See page 3-7,
Synchronization Methods.)
Certain oscilloscope operations can affect the BUSY? response. (See Table 3-3
on page 3-7.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
BUSY?
Related Commands
Returns
*OPC, *WAI
<NR1> = 0 means the oscilloscope is not busy processing a command whose
execution time is extensive.
<NR1> = 1 means the oscilloscope is busy processing a command whose execution
time is extensive. (See Table 3-3 on page 3-7.)
Examples
BUSY? might return :BUSY 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is now busy.
*CAL? (Query Only)
Performs an internal self-calibration and returns its status. This is equivalent to
selecting the Do Self Cal option in the Utility menu. Although *CAL? is a query
command, it does perform an action.
NOTE. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete. During this
time, the oscilloscope does not execute any commands.
Disconnect all signals from the oscilloscope before performing an internal
self-calibration.
Group
2-48
Calibration and Diagnostic
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Related Commands
Returns
*CAL?
CALibrate:INTERNAL
0 indicates that the self-calibration completed without any errors detected.
Any value other than zero indicates that the self-calibration did not complete
successfully or completed with errors.
Examples
*CAL? performs a self-calibration and might return 0 to indicate that it completed
successfully.
CALibrate:ABOrt (No Query Form)
NOTE. You should only use this command in a qualified service environment. For
more information about the factory calibration sequence, refer to the service
manual for your oscilloscope.
Aborts the factory calibration process. When you abort the factory calibration, the
oscilloscope restores the calibration settings to the previous factory calibration
constants stored in nonvolatile memory.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:ABOrt
Examples
CALIBRATE:ABORTstops the in-process factory calibration procedure.
CALibrate:CONTINUE (No Query Form)
NOTE. You should only use this command in a qualified service environment. For
more information about the factory calibration sequence, refer to the service
manual for your oscilloscope.
Performs the next step in the factory calibration operation.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-49
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Examples
CALibrate:CONTINUE
CALIBRATE:CONTINUEperforms the next step in the factory calibration operation.
CALibrate:FACtory (No Query Form)
NOTE. You should only use this command in a qualified service environment. For
more information about the factory calibration sequence, refer to the service
manual for your oscilloscope.
Starts the oscilloscope internal factory calibration operation. The calibration
operation consists of a sequence of steps. You send the CALibrate:CONTINUE
command to advance to the next calibration step. The calibration program
automatically sets up the oscilloscope for each calibration step. Use the
CALibrate:ABOrt command to abort the factory calibration.
You can only send synchronization commands or queries (such as *OPC, OPC,
*WAI, BUSY) while doing a factory calibration.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORYstarts the factory calibration process.
CALibrate:INTERNAL (No Query Form)
Performs an internal self-calibration but does not return any status. This is
equivalent to selecting the Do Self Cal option in the Utility menu.
NOTE. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete. During this
time, the oscilloscope does not execute any commands.
Disconnect all signals from the oscilloscope before performing an internal
self-calibration.
Group
2-50
Calibration and Diagnostic
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Related Commands
Examples
CALibrate:INTERNAL
*CAL?
CALIBRATE:INTERNALperforms an internal self-calibration.
CALibrate:STATUS? (Query Only)
Returns the status of the last calibration operation performed (either self- or
factory-calibration) since power on.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:STATUS?
Returns
PASS indicates that the oscilloscope completed the last calibration operation
without detecting any errors.
FAIL indicates that the oscilloscope detected errors during the last calibration
operation, or that no calibration operations have been performed since power on.
Examples
CALIBRATE:STATUS? might return CALIBRATE:STATUS FAIL, if the
oscilloscope failed the last calibration operation.
CH<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the current oscilloscope vertical settings. The value of <x> can vary from
1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.
Because CH<x>:SCAle and CH<x>:VOLts are identical, only CH<x>:SCAle is
returned.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>?
Related Commands
SELect:<wfm>
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-51
Command Descriptions
Returns
Examples
Oscilloscope vertical settings.
CH1? might return the following string for channel 1: CH1:SCALE
1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0; COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;PROBE 1.0E0
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Sets or queries the bandwidth setting of the specified oscilloscope channel. The
value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through
2 for 2-channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to setting the BW Limit option in the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:BANdwidth { ON | OFF }
CH<x>:BANdwidth?
Arguments
ON sets the channel bandwidth to 20 MHz.
OFF sets the channel bandwidth to the full bandwidth of the oscilloscope.
In most acquisition modes, full bandwidth is 40 MHz, 50 MHz, 60 MHz,
70 MHz, 100 MHz, or 200 MHz (depending on the oscilloscope model). There
are exceptions:
For TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series: At
vertical scales from 2.00 to 4.99 mV/div (sensitivity at the BNC; that is, after
the probe factor is removed), the full bandwidth is 20 MHz.
For TDS200 Series: At vertical scales of 5 mV/div or less (sensitivity at the
BNC; that is, after the probe factor is removed), the full bandwidth is 20 MHz.
When the acquisition mode is Peak Detect, and the vertical scale at the BNC
is 10 mV/div or less, the full bandwidth is also 20 MHz.
Examples
CH2:BANDWIDTH ON sets the bandwidth of channel 2 to 20 MHz.
CH1:BANDWIDTH? might return OFF. This indicates there is no bandwidth
limiting on channel 1.
2-52
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
CH<x>:COUPling
Sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting of the specified oscilloscope
channel. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to setting the Coupling option in the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:COUPling { AC | DC | GND }
CH<x>:COUPling?
Arguments
AC sets the specified oscilloscope channel to AC coupling.
DC sets the specified oscilloscope channel to DC coupling.
GND sets the specified oscilloscope channel to ground. Only a flat ground-level
waveform is displayed.
Examples
CH1:COUPLING AC establishes AC coupling on channel 1.
CH2:COUPLING? might return DC. Indicating that channel 2 is set to DC coupling.
CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe
Sets or queries the scale factor of the specified channel for current probes. The
value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through
2 for 2-channel instruments.
You can issue this command when CH<x>:YUNit <QString> is set to V. However,
this command only affects the readouts when CH<x>:YUNit <QString> is set
to A.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe {0.2 | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 50 | 100 | 1000}
CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-53
Command Descriptions
Arguments
0.2 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 0.2X attenuation.
1 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1X attenuation.
2 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 2X attenuation.
5 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 5X attenuation.
10 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 10X attenuation.
50 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 50X attenuation.
100 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 100X attenuation.
1000 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1000X attenuation.
Returns
Examples
<NR1>
CH2:CURRENTPROBE 1000 sets channel 2 to 1000X attenuation.
CH1:CURRENTPROBE? might return 10.
CH<x>:INVert
NOTE. You cannot use this command with a TDS210 or TDS220 oscilloscope with
firmware below V 2.00 and a TDS2CMA (or TDS2CM) communications module.
Sets or queries the inversion state of the specified oscilloscope channel. The
value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through
2 for 2-channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to setting the Invert option in the Vertical channel
menus.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:INVert { ON | OFF }
CH<x>:INVert?
Arguments
ON inverts the specified oscilloscope channel.
OFF sets the specified oscilloscope channel to noninverted.
2-54
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
CH1:INVERT ON inverts the signal on channel 1.
CH2:INVERT? might return OFF, indicating that channel 2 is not inverted.
CH<x>:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified oscilloscope channel. The
value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through
2 for 2-channel instruments.
The position voltage value is applied to the signal before digitization. This
command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel VERTICAL POSITION knob.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:POSition <NR3>
CH<x>:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> is the position in divisions from the center graticule.
Table 2-34: Vertical position ranges using a 1X probe
Examples
Vertical position
Range
2 mV/div
±1000 divs
5 mV/div
±400 divs
10 mV/div
±200 divs
20 mV/div
±100 divs
50 mV/div
±40 divs
100 mV/div
±20 divs
200 mV/div
±10 divs
500 mV/div
±100 divs
1 V/div
±50 divs
2 V/div
±25 divs
5 V/div
±10 divs
CH2:POSITION 1.32E0 positions the channel 2 input signal 1.32 divisions
above the center of the display.
CH1:POSITION? might return -1.32E0, indicating that the current position of
channel 1 is at -1.32 divisions.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-55
Command Descriptions
CH<x>:PRObe
Sets or queries the attenuation factor of the specified channel or voltage probes.
The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for 2-channel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe { 1 | 10 | 20 | 50 | 100 | 500 | 1000 }
CH<x>:PRObe?
Arguments
1 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1X attenuation.
10 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 10X attenuation.
20 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 20X attenuation. (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B,
and TPS2000 Series only)
50 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 50X attenuation. (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B,
and TPS2000 Series only)
100 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 100X attenuation.
500 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 500X attenuation.(TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B,
and TPS2000 Series only)
1000 sets the specified oscilloscope channel to 1000X attenuation.
Returns
Examples
<NR1>
CH2:PROBE 1000 sets channel 2 to 1000X attenuation.
CH1:PROBE? might return CH1:PROBE 10.
CH<x>:SCAle
Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified oscilloscope channel. The value
of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
2-channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel VOLTS/DIV knob.
2-56
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>
CH<x>:SCAle?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:VOLts
<NR3> is the gain, in volts or amps per division. For example, the voltage range is
5 V/div to 2 mV/div when using a 1X voltage probe.
CH1:SCALE 100E-3 sets the channel 1 gain to 100 mV/div.
CH2:SCALE? might return 1.0E0 , indicating that the current V/div setting of
channel 2 is 1 V/div.
CH<x>:VOLts
Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. The value of <x> can
vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel
instruments.
This command is identical to the CH<x>:SCAle command and is included for
compatibility purposes. Only CH<x>:SCAle is returned in response to a CH<x>?
query.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:VOLts
CH<x>:YUNit
Sets or queries the units of the specified channel. The value of <x> can vary from
1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.
Conditions
Group
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Vertical
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-57
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:YUNit <QString>
CH<x>:YUNit?
<QString> is either "V" for volts or "A" for amps. This is equivalent to setting
the probe to Voltage or Current in the probe front-panel menu. This command is
case insensitive.
CH2:YUNIT might return CH2:YUNIT "V", indicating that the channel 2 units
are volts.
*CLS (No Query Form)
The *CLS command clears the following oscilloscope status data structures:
The Event Queue
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
The Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and
MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates information
is in the output queue. The device clear (DCL) GPIB control message and the
USBTMC INITIATE_CLEAR control message will clear the output queue and
also MAV.
*CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV. *CLS can suppress a service
request that is to be generated by an *OPC command. This will happen if a hard
copy output or single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed when
the *CLS command is executed. (See page 3-1, Registers.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*CLS
Related Commands
DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
COUNTERFreq? (Query Only)
Returns all counter frequency parameters.
Group
2-58
Counter
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
COUNTERFreq?
COUNTERFreq:CH1Level
Sets or queries the CH1 trigger level value.
Group
Counter
Syntax
COUNTERFreq:CH1Level <x>
COUNTERFreq:CH1Level?
COUNTERFreq:CH1State
Sets or queries the CH1 counter frequency to be on or off.
Group
Counter
Syntax
COUNTERFreq:CH1State { OFF | ON | 1 | 0 }
COUNTERFreq:CH1State?
Examples
COUNTERFreq:CH1State OFF turns off the CHQ counter frequency feature.
COUNTERFreq:CH1Value? (Query Only)
Returns the CH1 counter frequency value.
Group
Counter
Syntax
COUNTERFreq:CH1Value?
COUNTERFreq:CH2Level
Sets or queries the CH2 trigger level value.
Group
Counter
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-59
Command Descriptions
Syntax
COUNTERFreq:CH2Level <x>
COUNTERFreq:CH2Level?
COUNTERFreq:CH2State
Sets or queries the CH2 counter frequency to be on or off.
Group
Counter
Syntax
COUNTERFreq:CH2State { OFF | ON | 1 | 0 }
COUNTERFreq:CH2State?
Examples
COUNTERFreq:CH2State ON turns on the CHQ counter frequency feature.
COUNTERFreq:CH2Value? (Query Only)
Returns the CH2 counter frequency value.
Group
Counter
Syntax
COUNTERFreq:CH2Value?
CURSor? (Query Only)
Returns current cursor settings.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor?
Returns
Examples
2-60
Oscilloscope cursor settings.
CURSOR? might return the following string as the current cursor
settings: CURSOR:FUNCTION VBARS;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 0.0E0;POSITION2
4.48E-3;:CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS VOLTS;POSITION1 0.0E0;POSITION2
5.0E-1.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
CURSor:FUNCtion
Selects and displays the oscilloscope cursor type. Cursors are attached to the
waveform selected by CURSor:SELect:SOUrce. This command is equivalent to
setting the Type option in the Cursor menu. Setting the function to anything other
than OFF causes the Cursor menu to be displayed.
NOTE. Setting the display format to XY removes the cursors. Sending the
CURSor:FUNCtion command when the display format is XY causes the
oscilloscope to generate event 221 (Settings conflict) and leaves the display in
XY format.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:FUNCtion { HBArs | OFF | VBArs }
CURSor:FUNCtion?
Arguments
HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors that measure the vertical units in volts,
amps, divisions, or decibels.
OFF removes cursors from the display.
VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors that measure time or frequency.
Examples
CURSOR:FUNCTION VBARS selects vertical bar type cursors.
CURSor:HBArs? (Query Only)
Returns the settings for the oscilloscope horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs?
Returns
Examples
Current horizontal bar cursor settings.
CURSOR:HBARS? might return the following string: CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS
VOLTS;POSITION1 0.0E0; POSITION2 0.0E0.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-61
Command Descriptions
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the difference (in vertical units) between the two horizontal bar cursors in
the oscilloscope display.
NOTE. If Trigger View is active, this query returns 9.9E37 and generates event
221 (Settings conflict).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA? might return 5.08E0 for the difference between the
two cursors.
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Positions a horizontal bar cursor. The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 2.
NOTE. If Trigger View is active, the query form returns 9.9E37 and generates
event 221 (Settings conflict).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the horizontal bar cursor position, relative to ground (in volts
when the units are volts and amps when the units are amps), relative to the center
of the screen (in divs when units are divisions), or relative to 1 V RMS (in decibels
when the source is an FFT math waveform), for the waveform specified by the
CURSor:SELect:SOUrce command.
The cursor position is limited to the graticule whenever an attempt is made to
move it outside the graticule.
NOTE. The source always determines the measurement units.
2-62
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3 positions one of the horizontal cursors
at 25.0 mV (assuming the vertical units are volts).
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2 might return -6.40E-2, indicating that the second
horizontal bar cursor is at -64.0 mV (assuming the vertical units are volts).
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical scale units for the selected cursor source waveform.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Returns
VOLTS indicates volts from ground as the unit of measure.
DIVS indicates divisions as the unit of measure, with center of screen as
0 divisions and bottom of screen as -4 divisions.
DECIBELS indicates decibels as the unit of measure, relative to a 1 Vrms sine
wave. (FFT only)
UNKNOWN indicates that Trigger View is active. This also generates event message
221. (Settings conflict)
AMPS indicates amperes as the unit of measure. (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only)
VOLTSSQUARED indicates volts squared (V*V) as the unit of measure.
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only)
AMPSSQUARED indicates amperes squared (A*A) as the unit of measure.
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only)
VOLTSAMPS indicates voltage times current (V*A) as the unit of measure.
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only)
NOTE. Unknown units are represented by "" in the oscilloscope readouts.
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS? might return CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS VOLTS.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-63
Command Descriptions
CURSor:SELect:SOUrce
Sets or queries the waveform that is the source of the vertical and horizontal scale
factors used in determining cursor values. This command is equivalent to setting
the Source option in the Cursor menu.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:SELect:SOUrce <wfm>
CURSor:SELect:SOUrce?
Arguments
Examples
<wfm> specifies the waveform data source on which cursor measurements will
be taken.
CURSOR:SELECT:SOURCE CH1 selects channel 1.
CURSOR:SELECT:SOURCE? might return MATH.
CURSor:VBArs? (Query Only)
Returns the current vertical bar cursor horizontal position and units settings.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs?
Examples
CURSOR:VBARS? might return CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS; POSITION1
1.00E-6;POSITION2 9.00E-6.
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the time or frequency difference between the two vertical bar cursors. The
units (seconds or Hertz) are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. If
the cursor source is an FFT math waveform, CURSor:VBArs:DELTa is always in
Hertz, regardless of the value set by CURSor:VBArs:UNIts.
NOTE. If Trigger View is active, this query returns 9.9E37 and generates event
221 (Settings conflict).
2-64
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA? might return 8.92E-1, indicating that the time
difference between the vertical bar cursors is 0.892 seconds.
CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the time or frequency difference between the two vertical bar cursors. The
units (seconds or Hertz) are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. If
the cursor source is an FFT math waveform, CURSor:VBArs:DELTa is always in
Hertz, regardless of the value set by CURSor:VBArs:UNIts.
The command is identical to the CURSor:VBArs:DELTa query. It is included for
compatibility with the TDS3000 Series.
NOTE. If Trigger View is active, this query returns 9.9E37 and generates event
221 (Settings conflict).
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
CURSOR:VBARS:HDELTA? might return 8.92E-1, indicating that the time
difference between the vertical bar cursors is 0.892 seconds.
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the waveform amplitude at the specified cursor position. The units are
specified by the CURSor:HBArs:UNIts query. <x> specifies the cursor. Valid
values are 1 and 2.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-65
Command Descriptions
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
<NR3> indicates the amplitude value at the selected position.
CURSOR:VBARS:HPOS1? might return 1.37, indicating the value of one vertical
bar tic.
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Positions a vertical bar cursor. The unit is specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
command, and can be in units of seconds or frequency (Hertz). If the cursor
source is an FFT math waveform, CURSor:VBArs:POSITION is always in Hertz,
regardless of the value set by CURSor:VBArs:UNIts.
NOTE. If Trigger View is active, the query form returns 9.9E37 and generates
event 221 (Settings conflict).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?
Arguments
<x> specifies which cursor to position. Correct values are 1 and 2.
<NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. The position is relative to the trigger except
when the cursor source is a math FFT waveform. The cursor position is limited to
the graticule whenever an attempt is made to move it outside the graticule.
Examples
2-66
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2 9.00E-6 positions the second vertical bar cursor
at 9ms.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1? might return 1.00E-6, indicating the first vertical
bar cursor is at 1 μs.
CURSor:VBArs:SLOPE? (Query Only)
Returns the change in amplitude divided by the change in time, as measured
between the two cursors. The units are derivable from the CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
and CURSor:VBArs:UNIts queries.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:SLOPE?
Examples
CURSOR:VBARS:SLOPE? might return 1.22E3, indicating the slope measured
between Vertical Cursor 1 and Vertical Cursor 2.
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors.
NOTE. When Trigger View is active, CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? generates event
221(Settings conflict).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts { SECOnds | HERtz }
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
Arguments
SECOnds specifies units of time.
HERtz specifies units of frequency (reciprocal of time).
Examples
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS sets the units for the vertical bar cursors to
seconds.
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS? returns HERTZ when the vertical bar cursor units are
Hertz.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-67
Command Descriptions
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical (amplitude) difference between the two vertical bar cursors.
The units are specified by the CURSor:HBArs:UNits query.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?
Returns
Examples
<NR3> indicates the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursors.
CURSOR:VBARS:VDELTA? might return 1.064E+0, indicating that the vertical
difference between the vertical bar cursor ticks is 1.064 units.
CURVe
Transfers oscilloscope waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in binary or
ASCII format. Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform
preamble that contains information such as data format and scale. For information
about the waveform preamble, refer to WFMPre?. The data format is specified
by the DATa:ENCdg and DATa:WIDth commands.
The CURVe? query sends data from the oscilloscope to an external device. The
data source is specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The first and last data
points that are transferred are specified by the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP
commands.
NOTE. If the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command is not displayed,
the CURVe? query returns nothing, and generates events 2244 (Waveform
requested is not activated) and 420 (Query UNTERMINATED).
In Scan Mode (Sec/div ≥100 ms and AUTO Mode), approximately one division
of data points will be invalid due to the blanked moving cursor.
The CURVe set command sends waveform data from an external device to the
oscilloscope. The data is stored in the stored waveform location specified by
DATa:DESTination, starting with the data point specified by DATa:STARt. Only
one waveform can be transferred at a time. The waveform will only be displayed
if the reference waveform is displayed.
2-68
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Refer to Waveform Commands for a description of the waveform transfer process.
(See page 2-32.)
Group
Waveform
Syntax
CURVe { <Block> | <asc curve> }
CURVe?
Related Commands
Arguments
DATa
<Block> is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as:
#<x><yyy><data> where <x> is the number of characters in <yyy>. For example,
if <yyy> = 500, then <x> = 3, where <yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer.
Refer to Block Arguments
If width is 1, then all bytes on the bus are single data points. If width is 2, then
all bytes on the bus are 2-byte pairs. Use the DATa:WIDth command to set the
width. <data> is the curve data.
<asc curve> is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for ASCII data
is <NR1>[,<NR1>...] where each <NR1> represents a data point.
Examples
CURVE might return the following ASCII data:
CURVE 13,6,3,2,-1,-9,-14,-19,-29,-35,-67,-1,-78,-62,
-50,-31,-27,-7,0,12,29,39,45,43,41,47,41,38,33,26
DATa
Sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred
with the CURVe command. Since DATa:DESTination and DATa:TARget are
equivalent, only DATa:DESTination is returned by the DATa? query.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
DATa { INIT }
DATa?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe
INIT reinitializes the waveform data settings to their factory defaults.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-69
Command Descriptions
Examples
DATA INIT reinitializes the waveform data settings to their factory defaults:
DESTINATION = REFA (=TARGET) ENCDG = RIBINARY SOUrce = CH1
START = 1 STOP = 2500 WIDTH = 1
DATA? might return the following string: DATA:ENCDG
RPBINARY;DESTINATION REFA; SOURCE REFB;START 1;STOP
500;WIDTH 2
DATa:DESTination
Sets or queries the reference memory location for storing oscilloscope waveform
data that is transferred into the oscilloscope by the CURVe command. This
command is identical to the DATa:TARget command.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
DATa:DESTination REF<x>
DATa:DESTination?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURVe
REF<x> is the reference memory location where the waveform will be stored.
DATA:DESTINATION REFA stores incoming waveform data into reference
memory REFA.
DATA:DESTINATION? might return REFB as the waveform location that is
currently selected.
DATa:ENCdg
Sets or queries the format of the waveform data. This command is equivalent
to setting WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, and WFMPre:BYT_Or. (See
Table 2-35.)
Setting the DATa:ENCdg value causes the corresponding WFMPre values to
update. Setting the WFMPre value causes the corresponding DATa:ENCdg
values to update.
Group
2-70
Waveform
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
DATa:ENCdg { ASCIi | RIBinary | RPBinary | SRIbinary |
SRPbinary }
DATa:ENCdg?
WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt
ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation of signed integer (RIBinary) data. If
this is the value at power-on, the WFMPre values for BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, and
ENCdg are set as RP, MSB, and ASC respectively.
RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first. This format results in the fastest data transfer rate
when DATa:WIDth is set to 2.
The range is -128 to 127 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Zero is center screen. The
range is -32768 to 32767 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one division
above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom
of the screen.
RPBinary specifies positive integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
The range is 0 to 255 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Center screen is 127. The range is
0 to 65,535 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one division above the top
of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen.
SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.
SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.
Table 2-35: DATa and WFMPre parameter settings
Examples
WFMPre settings
DATa:ENCdg
setting
:ENCdg
:BN_Fmt
:BYT_Or
ASCIi
ASC
N/A
N/A
RIBinary
BIN
RI
MSB
RPBinary
BIN
RP
MSB
SRIbinary
BIN
RI
LSB
SRPbinary
BIN
RP
LSB
DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY sets the data encoding format to be positive integer
where the most significant byte is transferred first.
DATA:ENCDG? might return SRPBINARY for the format of the waveform data.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-71
Command Descriptions
DATa:SOUrce
Sets or queries which waveform will be transferred from the oscilloscope by the
CURVe, WFMPre, or WAVFrm? queries. You can transfer only one waveform
at a time.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
DATa:SOUrce <wfm>
DATa:SOUrce?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURVe, WFMPre?
<wfm> is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the
oscilloscope to the external device. Allowable values are CH<x>, MATH, and
REF<x>. For TBS1000B/EDU models, FFT is also permitted.
DATA:SOURCE REFB specifies that reference waveform REFB will be transferred
in the next CURVe? query.
DATA:SOURCE? might return REFA, indicating the source for the waveform data
that is transferred using the CURVe? command.
DATa:STARt
Sets or queries the starting data point for waveform data transfers. This command
lets you transfer partial waveforms to and from the oscilloscope.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
DATa:STARt <NR1>
DATa:STARt?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe
<NR1> is an integer value that ranges from 1 to 2500, and specifies the first data
point that will be transferred. Data is transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or
2500, whichever is less. When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the values
are swapped internally for CURVe.
2-72
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
DATA:START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.
DATA:START? might return 214 as the first waveform data point that will be
transferred.
DATa:STOP
Sets or queries the last data point in the waveform that will be transferred when
executing the CURVe? command. This lets you transfer partial waveforms from
the oscilloscope.
When using the CURVe command, the oscilloscope stops reading data when there
is no more data to read or when the 2500 data point limit is reached.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
DATa:STOP <NR1>
DATa:STOP?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe
<NR1> is an integer value that ranges from 1 to 2500, and specifies the last data
point that will be transferred. When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the
values are swapped internally for CURVe.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set DATa:STARt to 1 and
DATa:STOP to 2500.
Examples
DATA:STOP 150 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 150.
DATA:STOP? might return 285 as the last data point that will be transferred.
DATa:TARget
Sets or queries the location for storing waveform data transferred from an
external device to the oscilloscope when executing the CURVe command. This
command is equivalent to the DATa:DESTination command and is included here
for compatibility with older Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
DATa:TARget
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-73
Command Descriptions
DATa:WIDth
Sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to be transferred when
executing the CURVe command. (Changing DATa:WIDth may change the
following WFMPre parameters: BIT_Nr, BYT_Nr, YMULt, YOFf, and YZEro.)
Group
Waveform
Syntax
DATa:WIDth <NR1>
DATa:WIDth?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe, WFMPre:BIT_Nr
<NR1> = 1 sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to 1 byte (8 bits).
<NR1> = 2 sets the number of bytes per waveform data point to 2 bytes (16 bits).
If DATa:WIDth is set to 2, the least significant byte is always zero.
Examples
DATA:WIDTH 1 sets the data width to 1 byte per data point for CURVe data.
DATALOGging? (Query Only)
Returns all the data logging parameters.
NOTE. Data Logging features are available only on TBS1000B, TBS1000 and
TDS2000C Series models.
Group
Data Logging
Syntax
DATALOGging?
DATALOGging:DURAtion
Sets the duration of the data logging, in minutes.
NOTE. Data Logging features are available only on TBS1000B, TBS1000 and
TDS2000C Series models.
Group
2-74
Data Logging
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
DATALOGging:DURAtion 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240,
270, 300, 330, 360, 390, 420, 450, 480, 540, 600, 660, 720,
780, 840, 900, 960, 1020, 1080, 1140, 1200, 1260, 1320,
1380, 1440, Infinite.
DATALOGging:DURAtion?
DATALOGging:SOURCE, DATALOGging:STATE
{ 30 | 60 | 90 | 120 | 150 | 180 | 210 | 240 | 270 | 300 | 330 | 360 | 390 | 420 | 450 |
480 | 540 | 600 | 660 | 720 | 780 | 840 | 900 | 960 | 1020 | 1080 | 1140 | 1200 | 1260 |
1320 | 1380 | 1440} is the data logging time period, in minutes.
{Infinite} runs data logging with no set time limit.
Examples
DATALOGGING:DURATION 30
enables data logging to last for 30 minutes.
DATALOGging:SOURCE
Sets up the data logging source.
NOTE. Data Logging features are available only on TBS1000B, TBS1000 and
TDS2000C Series models.
Group
Data Logging
Syntax
DATALOGging:SOURCE { CH<x> | MATH | FFT (on TBS1000B models
only)}
Related Commands
Arguments
DATALOGging:DURAtion, DATALOGging:STATE
CH<x> is a channel, where <x> is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
MATH is the MATH channel.
Examples
DATALOGGING:SOURCE CH1
sets up CH1 as the source location from which to log data.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-75
Command Descriptions
DATALOGging:STATE
Turns on or off the data logging feature.
NOTE. Data Logging features are available only on TBS1000B, TBS1000 and
TDS2000C Series models.
Group
Data Logging
Syntax
DATALOGging:STATE
DATALOGging:STATE { OFF | ON | 0 | 1 }
Related Commands
DATALOGging:DURAtion, DATALOGging:SOURCE
Arguments
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the data logging function.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on the data logging function.
Examples
DATALOGGING:STATE ON
turns on data logging.
DATE
Sets or queries the oscilloscope date value. The oscilloscope uses these
values to time stamp files saved to the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or to the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only), as well as show the time and date on the oscilloscope display.
Conditions
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
DATE <QString>
DATE?
Related Commands
2-76
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 and
TDS2MEM Series only.
TIMe
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a date in the form "yyyy-mm-dd".
DATE "2010-05-06" sets the date to May 6th, 2010.
*DDT (No Query Form)
Lets you specify a command or a list of commands to execute when the
oscilloscope receives a *TRG command, or the GET GPIB interface message, or
the USBTMC TRIGGER message. This is a special alias that *TRG uses.
TRG command, or the GET GPIB interface message, or the USBTMC TRIGGER
message.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*DDT { <Block> | <QString> }
*DDT?
Related Commands
*TRG
Arguments
<Block> or <QString> is a complete sequence of program messages.
The messages must contain only valid commands that must be separated by
semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands (See page 2-4,
Concatenating Commands.). The sequence must be ≤80 characters. <Block>
format is always returned as a query response.
Examples
*DDT #217ACQuire:STATE RUN<EOI> specifies that the acquisition system will
be started each time a *TRG command is sent.
DESE
Sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER).
The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the
Standard Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. (See
page 3-1, Status and Events.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
DESE <NR1>
DESE?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-77
Command Descriptions
Related Commands
Arguments
*CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE
<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of DESER
are set according to this value. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the
binary value 11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the register is set to 1,
the next most significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, and so on).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set to 1 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the
DESER maintains its value through a power cycle.
NOTE. Setting DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be
entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status
Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set ESER. For more information on
event handling, refer to the Status and Events section.
Examples
DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE, and OPC bits.
DESE? might return the following string DESE 186 , showing that DESER
contains the binary value 10111010.
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)
Returns the Pass/Fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution (those
run automatically at power on, or those requested through the Service Menu). Use
the DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query to determine which test(s) has failed.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Returns
PASS means that the oscilloscope passes all diagnostic tests.
FAIL means that the oscilloscope has failed at least one of the diagnostic tests.
Examples
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAG
Returns either PASS or FAIL.
2-78
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)
Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution
(those run automatically at power on, or those requested through the Service
Menu). The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested with
the pass or fail status of each.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
Returns
<QString> in the following format:
<Status>,<Module name>[,<Status>,<Module name>...]
Examples
DIAG:RESULT:LOG? might return "PASS-CPU, PASS-ACQ1,
PASS-EXTENSION" for power-up diagnostics.
DISplay? (Query Only)
Returns the current display settings.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay?
Returns
Examples
The current display settings
DISPLAY? might return DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;
PERSISTENCE OFF;CONTRAST 50; INVERT OFF.
DISplay:BACKLight
Sets the backlight value.
Conditions
Group
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Display
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-79
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
DISplay:BACKLight <NR3>
DISplay:BACKLight?
Sets the display backlight value in percent, as an integer, between 1 and 100.
DISplay:BRIGHTness
Sets or queries the brightness of the LCD display.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000 Series and TPS2000B Series only.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:BRIGHTness { 100 | 90 | 75| 60 | 45 | 30 | 15 | 0 }
DISplay:BRIGHTness?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DISplay:CONTRast
Sets the display brightness in percent.
DISPLAY:BRIGHTNESS 75 sets the display brightness to 75%.
DISplay:CONTRast
Sets or queries the contrast of the LCD display. This command is equivalent
to setting the Contrast option in the Display menu. The TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, and TDS2000B Series do not support
the DISplay:CONTRast command and the display contrast feature.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:CONTRast <NR1>
DISplay:CONTRast?
Related Commands
2-80
DISplay:INVert
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is an integer in the range from 1 through 100. The larger the value, the
greater the screen contrast.
DISPLAY:CONTRAST 63 sets the display contrast to 63%.
DISplay:FORMat
Sets or queries the oscilloscope display format. This command is equivalent to
setting the Format option in the Display menu.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:FORMat { XY | YT }
DISplay:FORMat?
Arguments
XY displays the voltage of channel 1 (horizontal axis) against the voltage of
channel 2 (vertical axis).
NOTE. Setting the display format to XY turns cursors off. Sending the
CURSor:FUNCtion command when the display format is XY causes the
oscilloscope to generate event 221 (Settings conflict) and leaves the display in
XY format.
YT sets the display to vertical values versus time format and is the default mode.
Examples
DISPLAY:FORMAT YT selects a voltage versus time format for the display.
DISPLAY:FORMAT? might return XY for the display format.
DISplay:INVert
Sets or queries the TDS1000B and TDS1000 display format. This command is
equivalent to setting the Display Style option in the Utility Options menu for
the TDS1000B and TDS1000 Series.
The TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS2000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series do not have a Display Style option,
but accept the DISplay:INVert command and query for compatibility. The query
always returns OFF.
The TDS200 Series is not supported.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-81
Command Descriptions
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INVert { ON | OFF}
DISplay:INVert?
Arguments
OFF chooses a default black-on-white display.
ON chooses a white-on-black display.
Examples
DISPLAY:INVERT might return OFF.
DISplay:PERSistence
Sets the length of time that data points are displayed.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:PERSistence { 1 | 2 | 5 | INF | OFF }
DISplay:PERSistence?
Arguments
1|2|5 specifies the length, in seconds, that the waveform points are displayed
on the screen.
INF specifies infinite persistence.
OFF specifies that persistence is turned off.
Returns
0 means that the persistence is turned off.
2 or 5 means that the persistence is set to two or five seconds.
99 means that the persistence is set to infinite.
Examples
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 5 specifies that the waveform points are displayed on
the screen for five seconds before they fade.
DISplay:STYle
Selects how to display the waveform data. This command is equivalent to setting
the Type option in the Display menu.
2-82
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:STYle { DOTs | VECtors }
DISplay:STYle?
Arguments
DOTs displays individual data points.
VECtors connects adjacent data points.
Examples
DISPLAY:STYLE VEC sets the display to connect adjacent data points.
DISPLAY:STYLE might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual
waveform data points.
ERRLOG:FIRST? (Query Only)
Returns the first entry in the error log, or an empty string if the error log is empty.
Use this command with ERRLOG:NEXT? to retrieve error log messages.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
ERRLOG:FIRST?
Returns
Refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope for information about error log
message format.
ERRLOG:NEXT? (Query Only)
Returns the next entry in the error log, or an empty string if the error log is empty
or you have reached the end of the log. To start at the top of the error log, run
the ERRLOG:FIRST? query to return the first error log message. Then use the
ERRLOG:NEXT? query to step through the error log.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
ERRLOG:NEXT?
Returns
Refer to the service manual for your oscilloscope for information about error log
message format.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-83
Command Descriptions
*ESE (No Query Form)
Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESER). The ESER
prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register (STB). (See
page 3-1, Status and Events.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*ESE <NR1>
*ESE?
Related Commands
Arguments
*CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the ESER
are set according to this value.
The power-on default for ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER
maintains its value through a power cycle.
NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit
5) of the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER. (See
page 3-5, Event Handling Sequence.)
Examples
*ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE, and OPC bits.
*ESE might return the string *ESE 186, showing that the ESER contains the
binary value 10111010.
*ESR? (Query Only)
Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also
clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it). (See page 3-1, Status and
Events.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*ESR?
Related Commands
2-84
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *OPC, *SRE
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Returns
Examples
Contents of the Standard Event Status Register.
*ESR? might return the value 213, showing that the SESR contains binary
11010101.
EVENT? (Query Only)
Returns from the Event Queue an event code that provides information about the
results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from the
Event Queue. (See page 3-5, Event Handling Sequence.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVENT?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE
<NR1>
EVENT? might return EVENT 110, indicating there was an error in a command
header.
EVMsg? (Query Only)
Removes from the Event Queue a single event code associated with the results
of the last *ESR? read, and returns the event code with an explanatory message.
(See page 3-5, Event Handling Sequence.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVMsg?
Related Commands
Returns
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE
The event code and message in the following format:
<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event Code><Comma>
<QString>...]
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-85
Command Descriptions
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned
when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope. As much of the command
as possible is returned without exceeding the 60 character limit of the <Message>
and <Command> strings combined. The command string is right-justified.
Examples
EVMSG? might return the message EVMSG 110, "Command header error"
EVQty? (Query Only)
Returns the number of event codes that are in the Event Queue. This is useful when
using ALLEv? since it lets you know exactly how many events will be returned.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVQty?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
ALLEv?, EVENT?
<NR1>
EVQTY? might return 3 as the number of event codes in the Event Queue.
FACtory
Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings. Refer to Appendix B:
Factory Setup for a list of the factory default settings.
Group
2-86
Miscellaneous
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
FACtory
Setting the oscilloscope to factory default has the following impact on the
programming interface:
Clears the Event Status Enable Register
Clears the Service Request Enable Register
Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255
Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE
Enables all Command Headers (HEADer ON)
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a "zero-length field"
Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations
Performs the equivalent of DATA INIT
The FACtory command does not change the following items:
State of the RS-232, GPIB, or USB interface
Selected GPIB address
Front panel LOCK state
Verbose state
Display Brightness, TPS2000 Series and TPS2000B Series only
Display Contrast, TDS1000, TDS2000, TDS1000B, and TPS2000 Series
Calibration data that affects device specifications
Stored settings
Stored waveforms or data
Hard copy parameters
Display messages language selection
Current page of paged menus
SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT
FILESYSTEM:CWD
Related Commands
Examples
*PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp, SAVe:IMAge:
FILEFormat
Refer to Appendix B: Factory Setup
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-87
Command Descriptions
FILESystem? (Query Only)
Returns the current working directory and amount of free space on the
CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the
USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, and TDS2000B Series only).
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem?
Examples
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM? might return FILESYSTEM:CWD "A:\";FREESPACE 29691904.
For TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM? might return FILESYSTEM:CWD "/usb0/";FREESPACE
2691904.
FILESystem:CWD
Sets or queries the current working folder path on the CompactFlash card
(TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series only).
Conditions
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem:CWD <folder path>
FILESystem:CWD?
Arguments
2-88
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
<folder path> is a quoted string that defines the folder name and path. The root
folder is A:\ for non-TBS1000B/EDU models and is /usb0/ for TBS1000B/EDU
models. If there is no CompactFlash card or USB flash drive installed in the
oscilloscope, the query returns a null string. This command is the easiest way for
a program to check for the presence of a CompactFlash card or a USB flash drive.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:CWD "A:\MYDIR" sets the current working folder to MYDIR.
FILESYSTEM:CWD? might return FILESYSTEM:CWD "A:\PROD-TST", if
PROD-TST is the current working folder.
For TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:CWD "/usb0/MYDIR" sets the current working folder to MYDIR.
FILESYSTEM:CWD? might return FILESYSTEM:CWD "/usb0/PROD-TST", if
PROD-TST is the current working folder.
FILESystem:DELEte (No Query Form)
Deletes the specified file name from the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or from the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only).
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem:DELEte <file path>
Arguments
Examples
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the folder path and file name of the
file to delete. The root directory is “A:\” for non-TBS1000B/EDU models and
is “/usb0/” for TBS1000B/EDU models. You cannot use an asterisk (*) wild
card character to delete multiple files. For example, FILESYSTEM:DELETE
"A:\PROD-TST\*.SET" is not valid for non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
Also, FILESYSTEM:DELETE "/usb0/PROD-TST/*.SET" is not valid for
TBS1000B/EDU models.
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:DELETE "A:\PROD-TST\1ST-RUN\TESTFREQ.SET" deletes
the setup file TESTFREQ.SET from the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or from the USB flash drive (TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only).
For TBS1000B models.
FILESYSTEM:DELETE "/usb0/PROD-TST/1ST-RUN/TESTFREQ.SET" deletes
the setup file TESTFREQ.SET from the from the USB flash drive.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-89
Command Descriptions
FILESystem:DIR? (Query Only)
Returns a list of strings. Each string contains the name of a file or folder
in the current working folder on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only).
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem:DIR?
Examples
FILESYSTEM:DIR? might return FILESYSTEM:DIR "ALL000","ALL001".
FILESystem:FORMat (No Query Form)
Formats the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series
only) or the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only). Formatting a
CompactFlash card or a USB flash drive deletes all files and folders on the
memory device.
Conditions
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem:FORMat <drive>
Arguments
2-90
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, , TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
<drive> is a quoted string that sets the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B and TDS1000B Series only)
to format. Valid non-TBS1000B/EDU drive values are "A:" and "a:". The valid
TBS1000B/EDU drive value is "/usb0/". Using any other drive value returns
an error.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
NOTE. The oscilloscope reads the internal structure of the CompactFlash card or
the USB flash drive every time the card is inserted. The time to complete the read
depends on the size of the card and how it was formatted. To significantly shorten
the initial read time of 64 MB and larger cards, format the card or flash drive as
FAT32 with your personal computer.
Examples
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:FORMAT "A:" formats the CompactFlash card, or the USB flash
drive.
For TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:FORMAT "/usb0/" formats the USB flash drive.
FILESystem:FREESpace? (Query Only)
Returns a numeric value, in bytes, of the memory space available on the
CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the
USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only). This command returns 0 (zero) when
there is no memory device installed in the oscilloscope.
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem:FREESpace?
Examples
FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE? might return 6242501.
FILESystem:MKDir (No Query Form)
Creates a folder at the specified location on the CompactFlash card
(TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series only).
Conditions
Group
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
File system
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-91
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
FILESystem:MKDir <folder path>
<folder path> is a quoted string that defines the location and name of the
folder to create. If you do not specify a path to the folder, the oscilloscope creates
the folder in the current working directory. The current directory refers to the
name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
Folder names must follow the same rules as file names. (See page 2-16, File
System Conventions.)
Examples
For all models.
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "VID-EVAL" creates a new folder VID-EVAL in the
current working folder.
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "A:\PROD-TST\2ND-RUN" creates a new folder
2ND-RUN in the existing folder A:\PROD-TST.
For TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "/usb0/PROD-TST/2ND-RUN" creates a new folder
2ND-RUN in the existing folder /usb0/PROD-TST.
FILESystem:REName (No Query Form)
Assigns a new name to a file or folder on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only). You can also move a file or folder by specifying the new name in a different
folder.
Conditions
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem:REName <old filepath>,<new filepath>
Arguments
2-92
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
<old filepath> is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the file
to rename. If you do not specify a path to the file, the oscilloscope looks for the
file in the current working folder. The current directory refers to the name of a
folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
<new filepath> is a quoted string that defines the path and new name of the
file. If you do not specify a path to a folder, the oscilloscope places the renamed
file into the current working folder. (See page 2-16, File System Conventions.)
Examples
For all models.
FILESYSTEM:RENAME "VID-CH1.BMP","VID-EVAL.BMP" renames the file
VID-CH1.BMP to VID-EVAL.BMP in the current working folder.
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:RENAME
"A:\PROD-TST\VID-EVAL1.BMP","A:\PROD-TST\VID-EVAL2.BMP"
renames the file VID-EVAL1.BMP to VID-EVAL2.BMP in A:\PROD-TST.
For TBS1000B/EDU models.
FILESYSTEM:RENAME
"/usb0/PROD-TST/VID-EVAL1.BMP","/usb0/PROD-TST/VID-EVAL2.BMP"
renames the file VID-EVAL1.BMP to VID-EVAL2.BMP in /usb0/PROD-TST.
For file and folder name rules, see File System Conventions. (See page 2-16.)
FILESystem:RMDir (No Query Form)
Deletes a folder at the specified location on the CompactFlash card
(TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series only).
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
File system
Syntax
FILESystem:RMDir <folder path>
Arguments
<folder path> is a quoted string that defines the location and name of the
folder to delete. If you do not specify a path to the folder, the oscilloscope deletes
the specified folder in the current working folder. The current folder refers to the
name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
NOTE. A folder must be empty before you can delete it.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-93
Command Descriptions
Examples
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR "/usb0/PROD-TST/2ND-RUN" deletes the folder
2ND-RUN in the folder /usb0/PROD-TST.
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR "VID-EVAL" deletes the folder VID-EVAL in the current
working folder.
FFT? (Query Only)
Returns all FFT parameters.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT?
FFT:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or queries the FFT horizontal display position.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
FFT:HORizontal:POSition?
FFT:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or queries the FFT zoom factor.
Conditions
2-94
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
FFT:HORizontal:SCAle?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
FFT:SOURce
Sets or queries the FFT source.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT:SOURce { CH1 | CH2 }
FFT:SOURce?
FFT:SRCWFM
Sets or queries the FFT source waveform display state.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT:SRCWFM { ON | OFF }
FFT:SRCWFM?
FFT:VERtical:POSition
Sets or queries the FFT vertical display position.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT:VERtical:POSition <NR3>
FFT:VERtical:POSition?
FFT:VERtical:SCAle
Sets or queries the FFT vertical zoom factor.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-95
Command Descriptions
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT:VERtical:SCAle <NR3>
FFT:VERtical:SCAle?
FFT:WIN
Sets or queries the FFT window state.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
FFT:WIN { HANNING | FLATTOP | RECTANGULAR }
FFT:WIN?
HARDCopy
Sends a copy of the screen display followed by an EOI to the port specified by
HARDCopy:PORT. The format and layout of the output is specified with the
HARDCopy:FORMat and HARDCopy:LAYout commands. This command
is equivalent to pressing the PRINT button on the front panel of the TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000,
TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series or the HARDCOPY button on the front panel
of the TDS200 Series.
NOTE. The TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
and TDS1000B Series support the HARDCopy:PORT commands and queries
for compatibility with programs designed for earlier oscilloscopes. (For
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series, you can only set the port to USB and the query will always
return USB). The TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, and TDS1000B oscilloscopes provide PictBridge printer support
through a USB Device port on the rear of the oscilloscope. PictBridge
Commands(See page 2-24, PictBridge Commands (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Only).)
HARDCopy? returns format, layout, and port information.
2-96
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
NOTE. This command is not IEEE Std 488.2-1987 compatible.
Group
Hard copy
Syntax
HARDCopy { ABOrt | STARt }
HARDCopy?
Arguments
ABOrt terminates the hard copy output in process.
NOTE. DCL does not clear the output queue once a hard copy is in process.
The only way to abort the hard copy process is to send the HARDCopy ABOrt
command. The output queue can then be cleared by sending a DCL message.
STARt initiates a screen copy that is sent to the port specified by the
HARDCOPY:PORT command.
NOTE. Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt commands to make
sure that the first hard copy is complete before starting another.
Examples
HARDCOPY ABORT stops any hard copy output that is in process.
HARDCopy:BUTTON
Sets or returns the current PRINT front-panel button function.
NOTE. This command does not affect the HARDCopy STARt command.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, , TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Hard copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:BUTTON { PRINTS | SAVESAll | SAVESImage }
HARDCopy:BUTTON?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-97
Command Descriptions
Arguments
PRINTS sets the PRINT button to send the screen image to the current printer
port, using the current printer format.
SAVESAll sets the PRINT button to save all active oscilloscope information
(waveforms, screen image, settings) to files in a new subfolder in the current
CompactFlash card folder (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or
in the current USB flash drive folder (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only).
SAVESImage sets the PRINT button to save the screen image to a file on the
CompactFlash card or on the USB flash drive.
Examples
HARDCOPY:BUTTON SAVESIMAGE sets the front-panel PRINT button to save
the screen image to a file when pushed.
HARDCopy:FORMat
Sets the hard copy output data format. This command is the same as setting the
Format option in the UTILITY > Options > Hard Copy or Printer Setup menu,
depending on your oscilloscope model.
NOTE. The TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
and TDS1000B oscilloscopes provide PictBridge printer support through a USB
Device port on the rear of the oscilloscope. (See page 2-24, PictBridge Commands
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Only).)
The HARDCopy:FORMat is always Exif/JPEG when printing to a PictBridge
printer.
For TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B oscilloscopes, use the HARDCopy:FORMat command to set the file
format when saving an image to a USB flash drive or over USBTMC.
Group
Hard copy
Syntax
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models. HARDCopy:FORMat { BMP | BUBBLEJet
| DESKJet | DPU3445 | DPU411 | DPU412 | EPSC60 | EPSC80 |
EPSIMAGE | EPSOn | INTERLEAF | JPEG | LASERJet | PCX | RLE |
THINKjet | TIFF }
For TBS1000B/EDU models. HARDCopy:FORMat { BMP | JPEG }
HARDCopy:FORMat?
2-98
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
BMP (non-TBS1000B/EDU Series only) sets the hard copy output format to
Microsoft Windows Bitmap format.
BUBBLEJet (TDS1000, TDS2000, TPS2000, and TPS2000B Series only) sets the
hard copy output format to Canon Bubblejet format.
DESKjet (TDS200, TDS1000, TDS2000, TPS2000, and TPS2000B Series only)
sets the hard copy output format to HP DeskJet format.
DPU3445 (TDS1000, TDS2000, TPS2000, and TPS2000B Series only), DPU411,
and DPU412 set the hard copy output format to Seiko formats.
EPSC60 sets the hard copy output to Epson C60 model printer format. Available
on TDS1000 and TDS2000 models with firmware versions 2.12 or greater
(two channel models) or 4.12 or greater (four channel models), any firmware
version with a TDS2CMA, TDS2CMAX, or TDS2MEM module installed, or the
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series.
EPSC80 sets the hard copy output to Epson C80 model printer format. Available
on TDS1000 and TDS2000 series models with firmware versions 2.12 or greater
(two channel models) or 4.12 or greater (four channel models), any firmware
version with a TDS2CMA, TDS2CMAX, or TDS2MEM module installed, or the
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series.
EPSIMAGE (non-TBS1000B/EDU Series only) sets the hard copy format data to
Postscript format.
EPSOn (TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only)
sets the hard copy output format to 9-pin or 24-pin dot matrix printer format.
INTERLEAF (TDS200 Series only) sets the hard copy format data to Interleaf
file format.
JPEG (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
and TDS1000B Series only) sets the hard copy format to JPEG format.
LASERJet (TBS1000, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200,
TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) sets the hard copy output format to HP
LaserJet II printer format.
PCX (non-TBS1000B/EDU) sets the hard copy output format to DOS Paintbrush
format.
RLE (TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) sets the hard copy
output format to Windows color image file format (*.RLE). Use RLE for faster
transfer rates and smaller resulting files. Many programs that recognize .BMP
files also recognize .RLE files.
THINKjet (TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only)
sets the hard copy output format to HP Thinkjet printer format.
TIFF (TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) sets the hard
copy output format to Tagged Image File Format.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-99
Command Descriptions
Examples
HARDCOPY:FORMAT LASERJET sets the hard copy output format to LaserJet II.
HARDCOPY:FORMAT? might return EPSON as the hard copy output format.
HARDCopy:INKSaver
Sets the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Ink Saver feature to on or off.
This command is equivalent to setting the Ink Saver option in the UTILITY
> Options > Printer Setup menu of TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
oscilloscopes. This command has no effect on the TDS1000 oscilloscope, but
is accepted for compatibility.
NOTE. This command also controls the format of saved images.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
Series only.
Group
Hard copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:INKSaver { ON | OFF }
HARDCopy:INKSaver?
Arguments
OFF prints "WYSIWYG" hard copies, with color waveforms on a black
background.
ON (default) prints color waveforms on a white background.
Examples
HARDCOPY:INKSAVER? might return ON.
HARDCopy:LAYout
Selects the printing orientation. This command is equivalent to setting the Layout
option in the UTILITY > Options > Hard Copy Setup menu.
NOTE. This command also controls the format of saved images.
2-100
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Only TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B oscilloscopes are compatible with PictBridge printers. When printing
to a PictBridge printer, the printer determines the orientation and will override
the argument.
Group
Hard copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:LAYout { LANdscape | PORTRait }
HARDCopy:LAYout?
Arguments
LANdscape specifies that the bottom of the hard copy is along the long side
of the piece of paper.
PORTRait specifies that the bottom of the hard copy is along the short side of the
piece of paper. This is the standard format.
Examples
HARDCOPY:LAYOUT might return PORTRAIT as the page layout format of the
hard copy output.
HARDCopy:PORT
Selects where to send the hard copy data when the oscilloscope receives the next
HARDCOPY STARt command. This command is equivalent to setting the Port
option in the UTILITY > Options > Hard Copy Setup menu.
NOTE. The TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
and TDS1000B oscilloscopes provide PictBridge printer support through a USB
Device port on the rear of the oscilloscope. (See page 2-24, PictBridge Commands
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Only).)
Group
Hard copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:PORT { CENtronics | RS232 | GPIb | USB }
HARDCopy:PORT?
Arguments
CENtronics specifies that the hard copy data is sent out the Centronics port.
RS232 specifies that the hard copy data is sent out the RS232 port. If you set the
port to RS232, and use it to transfer a BMP screen image format file to a PC or
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-101
Command Descriptions
other computer, observe the following precaution that the BMP file is a binary
file, and therefore does not use line feeds (hexadecimal 0a) as a terminator.
There are two ways to work around this limitation:
Write your controller program to use the byte count information in the BMP
file header.
Set your RS232 program time out value to a large enough value to guarantee
that the program does not time out before completing the data transfer. For
example, to transfer an 80 kB file at 9600 baud, set the transfer program time
out to 300 seconds.
GPIb specifies that the hard copy data is sent to the GPIB port. This argument is
available on instruments with a TDS2CM, TDSCMA, TDSCMAX, or TDSMM
module installed.
USB specifies that the hard copy data is sent to the USB Device port on the back
of a TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, or
TDS1000B Series oscilloscope only.
Examples
HARDCOPY:PORT might return RS232 as the selected hard copy output port.
HARmonics? (Query Only)
Returns settings for the HARmonic commands.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics?
Examples
HARMONICS? might return HARMONICS:ENABLE ON;SETUP AUTOMATIC;SHOW
ALL;SELECT 1;SOURCE CH1, indicating that the oscilloscope is acquiring and
showing all harmonics and measuring the first harmonic from channel 1.
HARmonics:ENABle
Turns the harmonics measurement on or off.
Conditions
Group
2-102
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Power Measurement
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
HARmonics:ENABle { ON | OFF }
HARmonics:ENABle?
ON causes the oscilloscope to display the harmonics menu and turn on Harmonics
analysis.
OFF causes the oscilloscope to display the CH1 menu.
Examples
HARMONICS:ENABLE ON causes the oscilloscope to display the harmonics menu.
HARMONICS:ENABLE? might return OFF, indicating that the harmonics menu
is turned off.
HARmonics:FREquency? (Query Only)
Returns the frequency of the selected harmonic.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:FREquency?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
HARMONICS:FREQUENCY? might return 3.60576923E2, indicating that the
frequency of the selected harmonic is 360.57 Hz.
HARmonics:HRMS? (Query Only)
Returns the RMS amplitude of the selected harmonic in the same units as the
source waveform.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:HRMS?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
HARMONICS:HRMS? might return 6.18267221409E-1.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-103
Command Descriptions
HARmonics:PERCent? (Query Only)
Returns the amplitude of the selected harmonic as a percent of the fundamental.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:PERCent?
Examples
HARMONICS:PERCENT? might return 5.0, indicating that the amplitude of the
selected harmonic as a percent of the fundamental frequency is 5.0%.
HARmonics:PHAse? (Query Only)
Returns the phase of the selected harmonic, in degrees, relative to the fundamental.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:PHAse?
Examples
HARMONICS:PHASE? might return 45.0, indicating that the phase of the selected
harmonic, relative to the fundamental frequency, is 45 degrees.
HARmonics:RMS? (Query Only)
Returns the amplitude of the harmonics source in RMS. This may be Vrms or Irms
depending on the type of source waveform.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:RMS?
Examples
HARMONICS:RMS? might return 120.0, indicating that the RMS value is 120
volts RMS.
HARmonics:SAVe (No Query Form)
Sets the file name and path to save the selected waveform harmonic data to the
oscilloscope CompactFlash card in .CSV format.
2-104
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
The following data is included in the file:
Harmonics, 1 through 50
Magnitude
Percent of fundamental
Frequency
Phase angle
NOTE. You can view the contents of the saved file on your personal computer. You
cannot recall saved harmonics files to the oscilloscope.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:SAVe <file path>
Arguments
Examples
<file path> specifies the full path to save harmonic measurement data.
HARMONICS:SAVE “A:\data1.CSV" specifies the file name and path to save
harmonic loss measurement data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card.
HARmonics:SELect
Selects an individual harmonic. If the harmonics function is enabled but the
requested harmonic is not currently on the screen, the oscilloscope will put it
on the screen. If the harmonics function is not enabled, the oscilloscope will
remember the requested value but will not enable the harmonics function.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:SELect <NR1>
HARmonics:SELect?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-105
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> specifies the harmonic from 1 to 50.
HARMONICS:SELECT 1 instructs the oscilloscope to select the first harmonic.
HARMONICS:SELECT? might return 3, indicating that the third harmonic is
selected.
HARmonics:SETUp
Sets or queries the operating mode of harmonics measurements.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:SETUp { MANUAL | AUTOMATIC }
HARmonics:SETUp?
Arguments
MANUAL The oscilloscope does not adjust the setup when entering or exiting the
harmonics measurement mode.
AUTOMATIC The oscilloscope adjusts various settings to optimize the harmonics
display. The oscilloscope returns to your previous settings when you exit the
harmonics measurement mode.
Examples
HARMONICS:SETUP might return AUTOMATIC.
HARmonics:SHOW
Sets or returns the type of displayed harmonics.
Conditions
2-106
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:SHOW { ALL | ODD | EVEN }
HARmonics:SHOW?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
ALL displays both odd and even harmonics.
ODD displays odd harmonics only.
EVEN displays even harmonics only.
Examples
HARMONICS:SHOW ALL instructs the oscilloscope to display all harmonics.
HARMONICS:SHOW? might return HARMONICS:SHOW ODD, indicating that
instrument displays only the odd harmonics.
HARmonics:SOUrce
Sets the source in the power menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:SOUrce { CH<x> }
HARmonics:SOUrce?
Arguments
Examples
CH<x> is one of the allowable input channels. The value of <x> can vary from 1
through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel instruments.
HARMONICS:SOURCE CH1 sets the source for the harmonics function to CH1.
HARMONICS:SOURCE might return CH1, indicating that the harmonics source
is channel 1.
HARmonics:THDF? (Query Only)
Returns total harmonic distortion of the waveform as a percentage of the
fundamental.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:THDF?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-107
Command Descriptions
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
HARMONICS:THDF? might return 1.1117748204298E1, indicating that the total
harmonic distortion is 11.11% of the fundamental frequency.
HARmonics:THDR? (Query Only)
Returns the total harmonic distortion of the waveform as a percentage of the
Vrms or Irms of the input signal.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
HARmonics:THDR?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
HARMONICS:THDR? might return 1.1094271493299E1, indicating that the
harmonic distortion is 11.09% of the RMS input voltage.
HDR
This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for compatibility
with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
HDR
HEADer
Sets and queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the oscilloscope to
either include or omit headers on query responses. This command does not affect
IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk); they
never return headers.
Group
2-108
Miscellaneous
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
HEADer { <NR1> | OFF | ON }
HEADer?
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the
oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then
use the query response as a command.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes
the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is
returned.
Examples
HEADER OFF causes the oscilloscope to omit headers from query responses.
HEADER? might return 1, showing that the Response Header Enable State is true.
HORizontal? (Query Only)
Returns all settings for the horizontal commands. The commands
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, HORizontal:SCAle, and
HORizontal:SECdiv are equivalent, so HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle is the value
that is returned.
The commands HORizontal:MAIn:POSition and HORizontal:POSition are
equivalent, so HORizontal:MAIn:POSition is the value that is returned.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal?
Returns
Examples
Returns all horizontal settings
HORIZONTAL? might return the following string: HORIZONTAL:VIEW
MAIN;RECORDLENGTH 2500;MAIN:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE
5.0E-4;HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 2.5E-4
HORizontal:DELay? (Query Only)
Returns all settings for the window time base. The commands
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv and HORizontal:DELay:SCAle are equivalent, so
only the values for HORizontal:DELay:SCAle are returned.
Conditions
This command is NOT applicable to TBS1000B/EDU models.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-109
Command Descriptions
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DELay?
Returns
Examples
All settings for the window time base
HORIZONTAL:DELAY? might return HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION 0.0E0;
SCALE 5.0E-4
HORizontal:DELay:POSition
Sets or queries the window time base horizontal position. This command is
equivalent to adjusting the Horizontal Position when Window Zone or Window
is selected from the Horizontal menu.
Conditions
This command is NOT applicable to TBS1000B/EDU models.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DELay:POSition <NR3>
HORizontal:DELay:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the position in seconds. This value is the difference between the trigger
point and the center graticule. Positive values place the trigger before the center
graticule.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION 2.0E-6 sets the window position to 2ms before
the center graticule.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION? might return -1.0E-3, indicating that the
window position is 1 ms after the center graticule.
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
Sets the time per division for the oscilloscope window time base. This command
is equivalent to setting SEC/DIV when Window Zone or Window is selected from
the Horizontal menu.
Conditions
2-110
This command is NOT applicable to TBS1000B/EDU models.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle <NR3>
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the time per division. The range depends on the oscilloscope model.
The acceptable values are in a 1-2.5-5 sequence. If the window time base scale is
set slower than the main time base scale, both the main and window time base
scales are set to the window scale value.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 2.0E-6 sets the window scale to 2 ms per division.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 9.0E-6 sets the window scale to 10 ms per
division. Since 9 μs is not a correct value within the 1-2.5-5 sequence, it is
automatically set to the closest correct value.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE? might return 1.0E-3, indicating that the window
scale is 1 ms per division.
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:SCAle. It is provided
to maintain program compatibility with some older models of Tektronix
oscilloscopes.
Conditions
This command is NOT applicable to TBS1000B/EDU models.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
HORizontal:MAIn? (Query Only)
Returns all settings for the oscilloscope main time base. The
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv and HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle commands are
identical so only HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle is returned.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-111
Command Descriptions
Returns
Examples
All settings for the main time base.
HORIZONTAL:MAIN? might return HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION
0.0E0;SCALE 5.0E-4
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition
Sets or queries the main time base horizontal position. This command is
equivalent to adjusting the Horizontal Position when Main is selected from the
Horizontal menu.
Horizontal
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition <NR3>
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the position in seconds. This value is the difference between the trigger
point and the center graticule. Positive values place the trigger before the center
graticule.
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION 2.0E-6 sets the main trigger position to 2ms
before the center graticule.
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION? might return -1.0E-3, indicating that the main
trigger position is 1 ms after the center graticule.
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Sets the time per division for the main time base. This command is equivalent to
setting SEC/DIV when Main is selected from the Horizontal menu.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle <NR3>
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?
Arguments
2-112
<NR3> is the time per division. The range depends on the oscilloscope model.
The acceptable values are in a 1-2.5-5 sequence. Other values are forced to the
closest acceptable value.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 2.5E-6 sets the main scale to 2.5 ms per division.
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
Sets the time per division for the oscilloscope main time base. This command is
identical to the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is provided to maintain
program compatibility with some older models of Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
HORizontal:POSition
Sets or queries the main time base horizontal position. This command is identical
to the HORizontal:MAIn:POSition command. This command is included for
compatibility.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the position in seconds. This value is the difference between the trigger
point and the center graticule. Positive values place the trigger before the center
graticule.
HORIZONTAL:POSITION 2.0E-6 sets the main trigger position to 2ms before the
center graticule.
HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return -1.0E-3, indicating that the main trigger
position is 1 ms after the center graticule.
HORizontal:RECOrdlength? (Query Only)
Returns the number of acquisition data points. For TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000,
TDS200, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 oscilloscopes, this value is always 2500, even
in FFT mode. This command is provided to maintain program compatibility with
other Tektronix digital oscilloscopes.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-113
Command Descriptions
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
WFMPre:NR_Pt?
2500
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH? returns 2500 as the number of data points in
each record.
HORizontal:SCAle
Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included for compatibility purposes.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:SCAle
HORizontal:SECdiv
Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included for compatibility purposes.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:SECdiv
HORizontal:VIEW
Specifies whether the horizontal display uses the Main, Window Zone, or Window
view. This is equivalent to setting the View in the Horizontal menu.
Conditions
2-114
This command is NOT applicable to TBS1000B/EDU models.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:VIEW { MAIn | WINDOW | ZONE }
HORizontal:VIEW?
Arguments
MAIn specifies that the waveform is acquired and displayed using the Main time
base.
WINDOW specifies that the waveform is acquired and displayed using the Window
(delay) time base.
ZONE is the same as MAIn, but adds display of vertical cursor bars to show the
part of the waveform that is acquired and displayed using the window (delay)
time base.
Examples
HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN specifies the default horizontal view.
ID? (Query Only)
Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and its firmware in
Tektronix Codes and Formats notation.
NOTE. ID? must be the last command when part of a concatenated statement.
Otherwise the oscilloscope generates event message 440.
The ID? and *IDN? responses are slightly different.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
ID?
Returns
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2CM,
TDS2CMA, and TDS2MM modules:
ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT,FV:v<oscilloscope firmware version
number>,TDS2XX:XXV:v<module firmware version number>
Where XX is the module type, CM (TDS2CM or TDS2CMA communications
module) or MM (measurement module).
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2MEM
modules:
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-115
Command Descriptions
ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:v<module firmware
version number>
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for
TPS2000B/TPS2000 oscilloscopes:
ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope firmware version
number> TPS2XXXV:v<module firmware version number>
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B oscilloscopes:
ID TEK/<model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope firmware version
number>
Examples
ID? might return the following response with a TDS2CMA installed: ID
TEK/TDS 220,CF:91.1CT,FV:V1.00 TDS2CM:CMV:V1.00
ID? might return the following response with a TDS2MEM installed: ID
TEK/TDS 2022,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:V6.00
ID? might return the following response with a TPS2PWR installed: ID
TEK/TPS 2012,CF:91.1CT FV:V9.48 TPS2PWR1:V1.00
ID? might return the following response for a TDS1012B oscilloscope: ID
TEK/TDS 1012B,CF:91.1CT FV:v21.21
*IDN? (Query Only)
Returns the oscilloscope identification code in IEEE 488.2 notation.
NOTE. *IDN? must be the last command when part of a concatenated statement.
Otherwise the oscilloscope generates event message 440.
The *IDN? and ID? responses are slightly different.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*IDN?
Returns
2-116
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2CM,
TDS2CMA, and TDS2MM modules:
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
TEKTRONIX, <model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope firmware version
number>,TDS2XX:XXV:v<module firmware version number>
Where XX is the module type CM (TDS2CM or TDS2CMA communications
module) or MM (measurement module).
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for TDS2MEM
modules:
TEKTRONIX, <model number>,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:v<module firmware
version number>
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for
TPS2000B/TPS2000 oscilloscopes:
TEKTRONIX,<model number>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope firmware version
number> TPS2XXXV:v<module firmware version number>
Returns the oscilloscope identification in the following format for
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B oscilloscopes:
TEKTRONIX/<model number>,<serial number>, CF:91.1CT FV:v<oscilloscope
firmware version number>
Examples
*IDN? might return the following response with a TDS2CMA installed: ID
TEKTRONIX,TDS 220,0,CF:91.1CT FV:v2.12 TDS2CM:CMV: v1.04
*IDN? might return the following response with a TDS2MEM installed: ID
TEKTRONIX,TDS 2022,0,CF:91.1CT TDS2MEM:FV:v6.00
*IDN? might return the following response for a TPS2012 oscilloscope
with a TPS2PWR1 power analysis module installed: TEKTRONIX,TPS
2012,0,CF:91.1CT FV:V9.48 TPS2PWR1:V1.00
*IDN? might return the following response for a TPS2022B oscilloscope with
the serial number CU10100: TEKTRONIX,TDS 2022B,CU10100,CF:91.1CT
FV:v20.22
*IDN? might return the following response for a TDS1012B oscilloscope with
the serial number CU010114: TEKTRONIX,TDS 1012B,CU010114,CF:91.1CT
FV:v21.21
LANGuage
Sets or queries the languages that the oscilloscope uses to display information on
the screen. This is equivalent to setting the Language option in the Utility menu.
Group
Miscellaneous
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-117
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
LANGuage { ENGLish | FRENch | GERMan | ITALian | SPANish
| JAPAnese | PORTUguese | KOREan | TRADitionalchinese |
SIMPlifiedchinese }
LANGuage?
Specifies the language used to display oscilloscope information on the screen.
LANGUAGE FRENch specifies that the oscilloscope displays information in French.
LANGUAGE? might return SPANISH.
LIMit? (Query Only)
Returns all limit testing parameters.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit?
Examples
LIMIT?
asks for all the limit testing parameters.
LIMit:COMpare
Sets or returns the template against which to compare the waveform acquired
through the specified channel. The template can be a waveform saved in any of
the reference locations REF1 through REF4.
Conditions
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:COMpare :REF<x>
LIMit:COMpare?
Related Commands
2-118
TBS1000 and TDS2000C models. Not applicable to TBS1000B models.
LIMit:TEMPLate
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
REF<x> is a reference waveform, where <x> is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
LIMIT:COMPARE REF1
specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which to compare waveforms
acquired on the specified channel.
LIMIT:COMPARE?
might return: REF4, indicating that waveforms acquired will be compared to the
limit test template waveform stored in REF4.
LIMit:RESUlt:FAIL? (Query Only)
Returns the number of failure cases.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:RESUlt:FAIL?
Related Commands
Examples
LIMit:RESUlt:PASS?, LIMit:RESUlt:TOTAL?
LIMIT:RESULT:FAIL?
might return: 25, indicating that 25 test cases were detected as failing.
LIMit:RESUlt:PASS? (Query Only)
Returns the number of pass cases.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:RESUlt:PASS?
Related Commands
LIMit:RESUlt:FAIL?, LIMit:RESUlt:TOTAL?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-119
Command Descriptions
Examples
LIMIT:RESULT:PASS?
might return: 25, indicating that 25 test cases were detected as passing.
LIMit:RESUlt:TOTAL? (Query Only)
Returns the number of total cases tested.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:RESUlt:TOTAL?
Related Commands
Examples
LIMit:RESUlt:FAIL?, LIMit:RESUlt:PASS?
LIMIT:RESULT:TOTAL?
might return: 25, indicating that there were 25 test cases detected.
LIMit:SAVEIMAge
Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope should save the screen image to a file on
a limit test failure event. When enabled, this command copies image data from
all active waveforms that have limit test failures to a file on the oscilloscope
flash memory drive.
Conditions
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:SAVEIMAge { OFF | ON | 0 | 1 }
LIMit:SAVEIMAge?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-120
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
LIMit:SAVEWFM
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the function to save waveform image data to the flash
drive for limit testing.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on the function to save waveform image data to the flash
drive for limit testing.
Examples
LIMIT:SAVEIMAGE ON
turns on the function to save waveform image data to the flash drive for limit
testing.
LIMit:SAVEWFM
Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope should save the waveform to a file on a
limit test failure event. When enabled, this command copies waveform data from
all active waveforms that have limit test failures to a file on the oscilloscope
flash memory drive.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:SAVEWFM { OFF | ON | 0 | 1 }
LIMit:SAVEWFM?
Related Commands
Arguments
LIMit:SAVEIMAge
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the function to save waveform data to the flash
drive for limit testing.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on the function to save waveform data to the flash drive
for limit testing.
Examples
LIMIT:SAVEWFM OFF
turns off the feature to save the waveform to a file on a limit test failure.
LIMit:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source channel for the waveform currently being compared to
the test template.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-121
Command Descriptions
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:SOUrce { CH<x> | MATH }
LIMit:SOUrce?
Related Commands
Arguments
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
CH<x> specifies that the source channel for the waveform currently being
compared to the test template.
MATH specifies the source channel as the math waveform.
Examples
LIMIT:SOURCE MATH
sets the MATH waveform as the source channel.
LIMit:STATE
Turns limit testing on or off, or returns whether limit testing is in effect.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:STATE { OFF | ON | 0 | 1 }
LIMit:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
LIMit:COMpare, LIMit:TEMPLate
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off limit testing.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on limit testing.
Examples
LIMIT:STATE OFF
turns limit testing off.
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe
Sets or restores the mode for the limit test stop after feature.
2-122
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe
{ MANual | WAVEform | VIOLation | TIMe }
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe, LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation, LIMit:STOPAfter:
WAVEform
MANual causes the test to stop after an operator manually stops it.
WAVEform causes the test to stop after the oscilloscope tests a specified number
of waveforms.
VIOLation causes the test to stop after the oscilloscope detects a violation.
TIMe causes the test to stop after the oscilloscope detects that the preset running
time has elapsed.
Examples
LIMIT:STOPAFTER:MODE?
might return VIOLATION
LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe
Sets or returns the limit test stop after time setting. The limit test will automatically
stop when it reaches the specified time, in seconds.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe <NR3>
LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe?
Related Commands
Arguments
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe, LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation, LIMit:STOPAfter:
WAVEform
<NR3> is the time in seconds to run the limit test.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-123
Command Descriptions
Examples
LIMIT:STOPAFTER:TIME 10
sets the limit test to run for 10 seconds.
LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation
Sets or returns the limit test stop after violation setting. The test will automatically
stop after it detects the specified number of violations.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation <NR3>
LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe, LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe, LIMit:STOPAfter:WAVEform
<NR3> is the number of violations to detect before stopping the limit test.
LIMIT:STOPAFTER:VIOLATION 10
sets the limit test to run until it detects 10 violations.
LIMit:STOPAfter:WAVEform
Sets or returns the setting for the limit test stop after waveform function. The test
will automatically stop when it tests the specified number of waveforms.
Conditions
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:STOPAfter:WAVEform <NR3>
LIMit:STOPAfter:WAVEform
Related Commands
Arguments
2-124
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe, LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe, LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation
<NR3> is the number of waveforms to test before stopping the limit test.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
LIMIT:STOPAFTER:WAVEFORM 1000
sets the limit test to run until it has tested 1000 waveforms.
LIMit:TEMPLate (No Query Form)
Uses the values specified by LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce,
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal, and
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical to create a limit test template and
store the template in the reference waveform memory location specified in
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination. You can compare the waveform acquired through
the specified channel against this template. The template can be a waveform saved
in any of the reference locations REF1 through REF4.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate APPLY
Related Commands
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, LIMit:TEMPLate:
TOLerance:HORizontal, LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
Arguments
APPLY creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances,
and stores it in the destination reference waveform to be used in the limit test
comparisons.
Examples
LIMIT:TEMPLATE APPLY
creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances, and stores it
in the destination reference waveform to be used in the limit test comparisons.
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination
Sets or returns the destination reference waveform that the LIMit:TEMPLate
APPLY command will use.
Conditions
Group
TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models only. It is not applicable for TBS1000B
Series models.
Limit Test
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-125
Command Descriptions
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination REF<x>
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination?
Related Commands
LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:
HORizontal, LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
Arguments
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform destination in which the template
waveform is to be stored.
Examples
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:DESTINATION REF2
specifies that the template waveform referred to with the LIMit:TEMPLate
APPLY command is stored as the REF2 waveform.
LIMit:TEMPlate:DUALSOUrce
Sets or returns the dual template waveform source. LIMit:TEMPLate:APPLY will
use this value in deriving the limit test template waveform, when the template
is created by a single source.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPlate:DUALSOUrce { CH1 | CH2 | MATH }
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVEFIRSource (No Query Form)
Save the first template source data information temporarily for applying the
template. It will not save to REFA.
Conditions
2-126
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVEFIRSource
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESECSource (No Query Form)
Save the second template source data information temporarily for applying the
template. It will not save to REFA.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESECSource
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESOUrce (No Query Form)
Saves the template source data for single waveform templates.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESOUrce
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source channel or math waveform that LIMit:TEMPLate
APPLY will use in deriving the limit test template waveform, when the template
is created by single source.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce { CH<x> | MATH }
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce?
Related Commands
LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:
TOLerance:HORizontal, LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-127
Command Descriptions
Arguments
CH<x> specifies that the template waveform source is the waveform currently
being acquired using the specified channel.
MATH specifies the template waveform source channel as the math waveform.
Examples
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:SOURCE CH2
specifies that the template waveform for limit tests is the waveform currently
acquired using channel 2.
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:SOURCE?
might return CH2, specifying that the template waveform source for limit tests is
the waveform currently stored as the channel 2 waveform.
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal
Sets or returns the amount, in units of horizontal divisions, by which the source
waveform is varied horizontally when creating the destination template waveform.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal <NR3>
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce,
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
<NR3> is the amount, in horizontal divisions, by which the source waveform is
horizontally modified to generate the template that is stored in the destination
reference. The range is 0 to 5 divisions.
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL 1.0
specifies that the source waveform is modified horizontally by a ±1.0 horizontal
division when generating the template waveform.
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL?
might return 1.0, specifying that the source waveform is modified horizontally by
a ±1.0 horizontal division when generating the template waveform.
2-128
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
Sets or returns the amount, in units of vertical divisions, by which the source
waveform is varied vertically when creating the destination template waveform.
Conditions
TBS1000B, TBS1000 and TDS2000C Series models.
Group
Limit Test
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical <NR3>
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce,
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal
<NR3> is the amount, in vertical divisions, by which the source waveform is
varied vertically when creating the test waveform. The range is 0 to 5 divisions.
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:VERTICAL 1.0
might return 1.0, specifying that the source waveform is vertically varied by ±1.0
vertical division when creating this test waveform.
LOCk
Enables and disables all front-panel buttons and knobs. There is no front-panel
equivalent.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
LOCk { ALL | NONe }
LOCk?
Arguments
ALL disables all front-panel controls.
NONe enables all front-panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL
command.
Examples
LOCK ALL locks the front-panel controls.
LOCK? returns NONE when the front-panel controls are enabled by this command.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-129
Command Descriptions
*LRN? (Query Only)
This is identical to the SET? query.
Miscellaneous
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*LRN?
MATH? (Query Only)
Returns the definition for the math waveform.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH?
Returns
Examples
Definition for the math waveform.
MATH? might return the following for an FFT waveform: MATH:DEFINE
"FFT(CH1,HANNING)";VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE
1.0E0;:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE
1.0E0;:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0
MATH:DEFINE
Performs the specified mathematical operation on the input signal or signals. To
activate or deactivate the math waveform, use the SELect:<wfm> command.
NOTE. Remember that <QString> must be enclosed in quotes. You can use white
space characters between words.
2-130
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:DEFINE <QString>
MATH:DEFINE?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
<QString> specifies a math waveform, and can be one of the following:
TDS1001, TDS1002, TDS1012, TDS2002, TDS2012 and TDS2022 models;
TDS210 and TDS220 models (firmware V2.00 and above) with a TDS2MM
measurement module.
CH1+CH2 CH1-CH2 CH2-CH1 FFT (CH<x> [, <window>]) TDS2004,
TDS2014 and TDS2024 models; TDS224 model with a TDS2MM measurement
module.
CH1+CH2 CH3+CH4 CH1-CH2 CH2-CH1 CH3-CH4 CH4-CH3 FFT (CH<x>
[, <window>]) TDS210 and TDS220 models, firmware below V2.00 with a
TDS2CMA communications module.
CH1-CH2 CH2-CH1 CH1+CH2 -CH1 -CH2 TDS210 and TDS220 models
(firmware below V2.00) with a TDS2MM measurement module.
CH1+CH2 (to subtract, invert one of the waveforms through CH<x>:INVert, and
then add) FFT (CH<x> [, <window>])TDS210 and TDS220 models (firmware
V2.00) and above with a TDS2CMA communications module.
CH1+CH2 CH1-CH2 CH2-CH1 TDS224 model with a TDS2CMA
communications module.
CH1+CH2 CH3+CH4 (4-channel models) CH1-CH2 CH2-CH1 CH3-CH4
(4-channel models) CH4-CH3 (4-channel models) TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
Series.
CH1+CH2 CH3+CH4 (4-channel models) CH1-CH2 CH2-CH1 CH3-CH4
(4-channel models) CH4-CH3 (4-channel models) CH1*CH2 CH3*CH4
(4-channel models) FFT (CH<x>[, <window>])
For FFT, the optional <window> argument is HANning, FLATtop, or
RECTangular.
Examples
MATH:DEFINE "CH1+CH2" sets the math waveform so that it displays the sum of
channel 1 and channel 2.
MATH:DEFINE "FFT (CH1, HANNING)" sets the math waveform to display an
FFT of channel 1 using a Hanning window.
NOTE. You can use this FFT example with TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series oscilloscopes, as well as a TDS200 Series oscilloscope with a
TDS2MM measurement module. It is not applicable for TBS1000B/EDU models.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-131
Command Descriptions
MATH:FFT? (Query Only)
NOTE. You can use this command with TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
oscilloscopes, as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement
module.
This command is NOT applicable for the TBS1000B
Returns the current MATH:FFT display settings.
Conditions
This command is not applicable for the TBS1000B/EDU.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:FFT?
Examples
MATH:FFT? might return the following: MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE
1.0E0
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition
NOTE. You can use this command with TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000C, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
oscilloscopes, as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement
module.
Sets or queries the FFT math waveform horizontal position.
Conditions
2-132
This command is not applicable for the TBS1000B/EDU.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the point in the FFT waveform data record to display at the
Examples
MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 25 sets the FFT waveform horizontal
center vertical graticule line. The data record point is a percentage of the total
record length, in the range of 0 to 100. The default value is 50. How much data
is displayed depends on the FFT Zoom factor setting. The oscilloscope rounds
<NR3> to the nearest workable value.
position such that the data at the 25% point of the record is centered on the display.
MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return 5.0E1, indicating that the
50% point in the data record is horizontally centered on the display.
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle
NOTE. You can use this command with TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
oscilloscopes, as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement
module.
Sets or queries the FFT math waveform horizontal zoom factor.
Conditions
This command is not applicable for the TBS1000B/EDU
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the horizontal magnification factor, where the axis of
magnification is the center vertical graticule line. Valid zoom factors are 1, 2, 5,
and 10. If other values are entered the oscilloscope rounds the value of <NR3> to
the nearest valid zoom factor.
MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5 sets the FFT waveform horizontal zoom
factor to X5.
MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return 2.0E0, indicating that the zoom
factor setting is X2.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-133
Command Descriptions
MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition
NOTE. You can use this command with TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
oscilloscopes, as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement
module.
Sets or queries the FFT math waveform vertical position.
Conditions
This command is not applicable for the TBS1000B/EDU.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition <NR3>
MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the FFT waveform vertical position in divisions.
MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 2 sets the FFT waveform vertical position to
2 major divisions above the center horizontal graticule line.
MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION? might return 5, indicating that the FFT
waveform 0 reference point is 5 major divisions from the center horizontal
graticule line.
MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle
NOTE. You can use this command with TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000
oscilloscopes, as well as a TDS200 oscilloscope with a TDS2MM measurement
module.
Sets or queries the FFT math waveform vertical zoom factor.
Conditions
Group
2-134
This command is not applicable for the TBS1000B/EDU.
Math
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle <NR3>
MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle?
<NR3> specifies the vertical zoom factor, where the axis of magnification is the
center horizontal graticule line. Valid zoom factors are 0.5, 1, 2, 5, and 10. If
other values are entered the oscilloscope rounds the value of <NR3> to the nearest
valid zoom factor.
MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:SCALE 5 sets the FFT waveform vertical zoom factor
to X5.
MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:SCALE? might return 2.0E0, indicating that the zoom
factor setting is X2.
MATH:VERtical? (Query Only)
Returns the MATH:VERtical display settings.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:VERtical?
Examples
MATH:VERTICAL?? might return MATH:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE
5.0E-1, indicating the math waveform position and scale.
MATH:VERtical:POSition
Sets or returns the math waveform display position.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:VERtical:POSition <NR3>
MATH:VERtical:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the math vertical position in divisions from center screen.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-135
Command Descriptions
Examples
MATH:VERTICAL:POSITION might return -3.0E0, indicating that the math
waveform is 3 divisions below center screen.
MATH:VERtical:SCAle
Sets or returns the math waveform display scale in units per division. It is not
possible to use this command to set the math scale to a fine scale not achievable
from the front panel. This command typically rounds down to an achievable value.
If the value input is below the minimum value, then the command will round up.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH:VERtical:SCAle <NR3>
MATH:VERtical:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the math vertical scale in units per division.
MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE 5.0E0 sets the math vertical scale to five math
waveform units per division.
MEASUrement? (Query Only)
Returns the current MEASUrement settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement?
Returns
Examples
Oscilloscope measurement settings.
MEASUREMENT? might return the following:
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "S";SOURCE CH1;
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE FREQUENCY;UNITS "HZ";SOURCE
CH1; MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE PK2PK;UNITS "V";SOURCE
2-136
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
CH2; MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE MEAN;UNITS "V";SOURCE CH2;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE CRMS;UNITS "V";SOURCE CH1
MEASUrement:CLEARSNAPSHOT (No Query Form)
Clears the existing snapshop results and removes the snapshot window.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:CLEARSNAPSHOT
MEASUrement:GATing
Sets or returns the measurement gating.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:GATing { OFF | ON | 0 | 1 }
Arguments
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off gating.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on gating.
MEASUrement:IMMed? (Query Only)
Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters. Immediate queries
and commands are the preferred methods for programming. An immediate
measurement selection is not visible or accessible through the display screen
or front panel.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-137
Command Descriptions
Returns
Examples
Immediate measurement setup parameters
MEASUREMENT:IMMED? might return PERIOD;"s";CH1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce[1]
Sets or queries the source for single-source immediate measurements.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce[1] { CH<x> | MATH }
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce[1]?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies the measurement source channel as one of the input channels.
The value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for 2-channel instruments.
MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math waveform.
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only)
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the immediate
measurement source.
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Sets or queries the secondary source for dual-source immediate measurements.
For example, power analysis and phase angle measurements.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
NOTE. This command is only available when the Power Analysis Module
application key is installed.
2-138
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 { CH<x> | MATH }
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
CH<x> specifies the measurement source channel as one of the input channels. The
value of <x> can vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2
for 2-channel instruments. For power analysis, Source2 must be Amperes.
MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math waveform.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 CH2 specifies channel 2 as the immediate
measurement source.
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Sets or queries the immediate measurement type.
NOTE. Selecting one of the power arguments for this command, without installing
the Power Analysis Module application key, will generate an error.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe { CRMs | CURSORRms | DELay | FALL |
FREQuency | MAXImum | MEAN | MINImum | NONe | NWIdth | PDUty
|PERIod | PHAse | PK2pk | PWIdth| RISe }
For TPS2000 with a TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module.
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe { WFCREST | WFFREQ | WFCYCRMS |
TRUEPOWER | VAR | POWERFACTOR | PFPHASE | Phase }
For TBS1000B/EDU models.
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe { CRMs | FALL | FREQuency | MAXImum |
MEAN | MINImum | NONe | NWIdth | PERIod | PK2pk | PWIdth |
RISe | RMS | CURSORRms | PDUTy | PHAse | DELAYRR | DELAYRF |
DELAYFR | DELAYFF | AMplitude | CMEAN | High | LOW | NDUty |
POVERshoot | NOVERshoot | CURSORMean | BURSTWIDth | AREA |
CAREA | PPULSECount | NPULSECount | REDGECount | FEDGECount
}
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
Arguments
CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage of the first complete cycle in the
waveform.
CURSORRms (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU Series)
is the true Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the selected waveform data,
between the start point and the end point.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-139
Command Descriptions
DELay (TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU Series) (not applicable for
TBS1000B/EDU models) is the delay from one waveform's edge event to another.
FALL (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the fall time between 90%
and 10% of the first falling edge of the waveform. Falling edge must be
displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and
90% measurement points.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz.
MAXImum (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series
only) is the value of the largest point in the waveform.
MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.
MINImum (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series
only) is the value of the smallest point in the waveform.
NWIdth (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the negative pulse width
between the first falling edge and the next rising edge at the waveform 50%
level. Falling and rising edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope
automatically calculates the 50% measurement point.
PDUty (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU Series) is the
ratio of the pulse width to the signal period, expressed as a percentage.
PERIod is the duration, in seconds, of the first complete cycle in the waveform.
PHAse (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU Series) is the
phase difference from the selected waveform to the designated waveform.
PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.
PWIdth (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the positive pulse width between
the first rising edge and the next falling edge at the waveform 50% level. Rising
and falling edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically
calculates the 50% measurement point.
RISe (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the rise time between 10% and
90% of the first rising edge of the waveform. Rising edge must be displayed
to measure. The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and 90%
measurement points.
2-140
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
The following are for use with the TPS2000 Series with the TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module:
PFPHASE (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module
only) is the phase angle measurement in degrees. Source 1 must be volts; source
2 must be Amperes.
PHAse (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module
only) is the measurement of phase between source 1 and source 2, in degrees.
POWERFACTOR (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis
Module only) is the true power factor ratio measurement. Source 1 must be volts;
source 2 must be Amperes.
TRUEPOWER (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis
Module only) is the true power measurement in Watts. Source 1 must be volts;
source 2 must be Amperes.
VAR (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module
only) is the reactive power measurement. Source 1 must be volts; source 2 must
be Amperes.
WFCREST (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module
only) is the measurement of the maximum value to the cycle RMS value of the
waveform, a unit-less ratio.
WFCYCRMS (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis
Module only) is the measurement of RMS voltage calculated over the first cycle,
using the min-max, high-low method.
WFFREQ (TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power Analysis Module
only) is the measurement of frequency using the min-max, high-low method.
DELAYRR (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the time between the mid reference
(default 50%) amplitude point of two different rising waveforms.
DELAYRF (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the time between the mid reference
(default 50%) amplitude point of the rising and falling waveforms.
DELAYFR (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the time between the mid reference
(default 50%) amplitude point of the falling and rising waveforms.
DELAYFF (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the between the mid reference (default
50%) amplitude point of the two different falling waveforms.
AMplitude (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the high value less the low value
measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
CMEAN (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) (cycle mean) is the arithmetic mean over
the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
HIGH (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the value used as 100% whenever high
reference, mid reference, or low reference values are needed, such as in fall time
or rise time measurements. Calculate using either the min-max or histogram
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-141
Command Descriptions
method. The min-max method uses the maximum value found. The histogram
method uses the most common value found above the midpoint. This value is
measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
LOW (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the value used as 0% whenever high
reference, mid reference, or low reference values are needed, such as in fall time
or rise time measurements. Calculate using either the min-max or histogram
method. The min-max method uses the minimum value found. The histogram
method uses the most common value found below the midpoint. This value is
measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
NDUty (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the ratio of the negative pulse width to
the signal period expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the
first cycle in the waveform or gated region.
POVERshoot (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is measured over the entire
waveform or gated region and is expressed as:
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum – High) / Amplitude * 100%.
NOVERshoot (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is measured over the entire
waveform or gated region and is expressed as:
Negative Overshoot = (Low – Minimum) / Amplitude * 100%.
CURSORMean (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the arithmetic mean of the
waveform data from the selected starting to the ending point.
BURSTWIDth (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the duration of a burst (a series of
transient events) and is measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
AREA (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is a voltage over time measurement. It
returns the area over the entire waveform or gated region in volt-seconds. Area
measured above ground is positive. Area measured below ground is negative.
CAREA (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) (cycle area) is a voltage over time
measurement. The measurement is the area over the first cycle in the waveform
or the first cycle in the gated region expressed in volt-seconds. The area above
the common reference point is positive. The area below the common reference
point is negative.
PPULSECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of positive pulses
that rise above the mid reference crossing in the waveform or gated region.
NPULSECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of negative pulses
that fall below the mid reference crossing in the waveform or gated region.
REDGECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of positive transitions
from the low reference value to the high reference value in the waveform or
gated region.
FEDGECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of negative transitions
from the high reference value to the low reference value in the waveform or
gated region.
2-142
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE FREQUENCY defines the immediate measurement to
be a frequency measurement.
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the units for the immediate oscilloscope measurement.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Returns
<QString> returns "V" for volts, "s" for seconds, or "Hz" for Hertz.
For the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series, <QString> can also return the
following:
A for amps
VA for volt-amperes
AA for amperes*amperes
VV for volts*volts
You can also use this command for undefined math waveforms.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS? might return "s", indicating that the unit for the
immediate measurement is seconds.
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only)
Executes the immediate oscilloscope measurement specified by the
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is taken on the
source specified by the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce command. Immediate
queries and commands are the preferred measurement method for programming.
To check whether the measurement was successful, use the *ESR? query followed
by the EVENT? or ALLEv? queries to read the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR).
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-143
Command Descriptions
NOTE. If the channel specified by MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce is not currently
displayed, the oscilloscope generates event 2225 and returns 9.9E37.
If Trigger View is active, Scan mode is in effect, or the display format is set to XY,
this query returns 9.9E37 and generates event 221 (Settings conflict)
When math is FFT, turned on, and used as a measurement source, attempting to
query the measurement value returns 9.9e37 and raises error 2225 (no waveform
to measure).
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
*ESR?, EVENT?
<NR3>
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? might return 28.75E6 if you are measuring
the frequency of a 28.75 MHz signal.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? might return 9.9E37, which means that the
channel specified by MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce is not currently displayed.
*ESR? after a measurement query might return 16, indicating that there are error
messages in the queue.
ALLEV might return ALLEV 541,"Measurement warning, Low signal
amplitude: "
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? (Query Only)
Returns all measurement parameters for the displayed oscilloscope periodic
measurement specified by <x>. Where <x> identifies the measurement, 1
through 4 for the TDS200 Series, and 1 through 5 for the TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series, and 1 through 6 for the TBS1000B/EDU Series.
2-144
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Returns
Examples
Settings for the specified measurement source.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3? might return PERIOD;"s";CH1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce
Sets or queries the source for an automated measurement. Where <x>
identifies the measurement, 1 through 4 for the TDS200 Series, and 1 through
5 for the TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series, and 1 through 6 for the
TBS1000B/EDU Series.
This is equivalent to selecting the measurement source in the MEASURE menu.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce { CH<y> | MATH }
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<y> specifies the input channel source for the measurement.
MATH specifies the measurement source channel as the math waveform.
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only)
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE CH1 sets the source for Measurement 2 to
channel 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Sets or queries the on-screen periodic oscilloscope measurement type for the
measurement specified by <x>. Where <x> identifies the measurement, 1
through 4 for the TDS200 Series, and 1 through 5 for the TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series, and 1 through 6 for the TBS1000B/EDU Series.
This is equivalent to selecting the measurement type in the MEASURE menu.
Setting the type to anything other than NONE displays the MEASURE menu
on the screen.
NOTE. You should use the MEASUrement:IMMed command with programming to
take measurements, as this is preferred to the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>command.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-145
Command Descriptions
Group
Measurement
Syntax
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe { CRMs | CURSORRms | DELay | FALL |
FREQuency | MAXImum | MEAN | MINImum | NONe | NWIdth | PDUty
| PERIod | PHAse | PK2pk | PWIdth| RISe }
For TBS1000B/EDU models.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe { CRMs | FALL | FREQuency | MAXImum
| MEAN | MINImum | NONe | NWIdth | PERIod | PK2pk | PWIdth |
RISe | RMS | CURSORRms | PDUTy | PHAse | DELAYRR | DELAYRF |
DELAYFR | DELAYFF | AMplitude | CMEAN | High | LOW | NDUty |
POVERshoot | NOVERshoot | CURSORMean | BURSTWIDth | AREA |
CAREA | PPULSECount | NPULSECount | REDGECount | FEDGECount
}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?
Arguments
CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage of the first complete cycle in the
waveform.
CURSORRms (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU Series)
is the true Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the selected waveform data,
between the start point and the end point.
DELay (TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU Series) (not applicable for
TBS1000B/EDU models) is the delay from one waveform's edge event to another.
FALL (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the fall time between 90%
and 10% of the first falling edge of the waveform. Falling edge must be
displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and
90% measurement points.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz.
MAXImum (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TD1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series
only) is the value of the largest point in the waveform.
MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.
MINImum (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series
only) is the value of the smallest point in the waveform.
NONE disables the measurement specified by <x>.
2-146
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
NWIdth (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000. TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the negative pulse width
between the first falling edge and the next rising edge at the waveform 50%
level. Falling and rising edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope
automatically calculates the 50% measurement point.
PDUty (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, and TDS1000C-EDU Series) is
the ratio of the pulse width to the signal period, expressed as a percentage.
PERIod is the duration, in seconds, of the first complete cycle in the waveform.
PHAse (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, and TDS1000C-EDU Series) is
the phase difference from the selected waveform to the designated waveform.
PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.
PWIdth (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the positive pulse width between
the first rising edge and the next falling edge at the waveform 50% level. Rising
and falling edges must be displayed to measure. The oscilloscope automatically
calculates the 50% measurement point.
RISe (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is the rise time between 10% and
90% of the first rising edge of the waveform. Rising edge must be displayed
to measure. The oscilloscope automatically calculates the 10% and 90%
measurement points.
DELAYRR (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the time between the mid reference
(default 50%) amplitude point of two different rising waveforms.
DELAYRF (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the time between the mid reference
(default 50%) amplitude point of the rising and falling waveforms.
DELAYFR (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the time between the mid reference
(default 50%) amplitude point of the falling and rising waveforms.
DELAYFF (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the between the mid reference (default
50%) amplitude point of the two different falling waveforms.
AMplitude (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the high value less the low value
measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
CMEAN (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) (cycle mean) is the arithmetic mean over
the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
HIGH (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the value used as 100% whenever high
reference, mid reference, or low reference values are needed, such as in fall time
or rise time measurements. Calculate using either the min-max or histogram
method. The min-max method uses the maximum value found. The histogram
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-147
Command Descriptions
method uses the most common value found above the midpoint. This value is
measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
LOW (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the value used as 0% whenever high
reference, mid reference, or low reference values are needed, such as in fall time
or rise time measurements. Calculate using either the min-max or histogram
method. The min-max method uses the minimum value found. The histogram
method uses the most common value found below the midpoint. This value is
measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
NDUty (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the ratio of the negative pulse width to
the signal period expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the
first cycle in the waveform or gated region.
POVERshoot (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is measured over the entire
waveform or gated region and is expressed as:
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum – High) / Amplitude * 100%.
NOVERshoot (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is measured over the entire
waveform or gated region and is expressed as:
Negative Overshoot = (Low – Minimum) / Amplitude * 100%.
CURSORMean (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the arithmetic mean of the
waveform data from the selected starting to the ending point.
BURSTWIDth (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the duration of a burst (a series of
transient events) and is measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
AREA (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is a voltage over time measurement. It
returns the area over the entire waveform or gated region in volt-seconds. Area
measured above ground is positive. Area measured below ground is negative.
CAREA (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) (cycle area) is a voltage over time
measurement. The measurement is the area over the first cycle in the waveform
or the first cycle in the gated region expressed in volt-seconds. The area above
the common reference point is positive. The area below the common reference
point is negative.
PPULSECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of positive pulses
that rise above the mid reference crossing in the waveform or gated region.
NPULSECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of negative pulses
that fall below the mid reference crossing in the waveform or gated region.
REDGECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of positive transitions
from the low reference value to the high reference value in the waveform or
gated region.
FEDGECount (TBS1000B/EDU Series only) is the number of negative transitions
from the high reference value to the low reference value in the waveform or
gated region.
2-148
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE CRMS specifies MEAS3 to calculate the true Root
Mean Square value.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the units for the oscilloscope measurement specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe. Where <x> identifies the measurement, 1
through 4 for the TDS200 Series, and 1 through 5 for the TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series, and 1 through 6 for the TBS1000B/EDU Series.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Returns
<QString> returns "V" for volts, "s" for seconds, or "Hz" for Hertz, or a null
string if MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe is set to NONE.
For the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series, <QString> can also return the
following:
A for amps
VA for volt-amperes
AA for amperes*amperes
VV for volts*volts
You can also use this command for undefined math waveforms.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:UNITS might return "V", indicating the units for
measurement 3 are volts.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only)
Returns the value that was calculated for the oscilloscope on-screen periodic
measurement specified by <x>. Where <x> identifies the measurement, 1
through 4 for the TDS200 Series, and 1 through 5 for the TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series, and 1 through 6 for the TBS1000B/EDU Series.
This value is a display value and will be updated about every 1/2 second if both
the MEASURE menu and the MEAS<x> source channel are displayed. If you are
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-149
Command Descriptions
acquiring at a slow sweep rate, the oscilloscope may take longer than 1/2 second
to update.
NOTE. MEASurement:IMMed is usually more useful than
MEASUrement:MEAS<x> when using the oscilloscope with external
devices.
If MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe is set to NONE,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue generates event message 2231 (Measurement
error, measurement is not activated) and returns 9.9E37.
If the channel specified by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce is not displayed
on the oscilloscope, the oscilloscope generates event message 2225 (Measurement
error, no waveform to measure) and returns 9.9E37.
Use the *ESR? and ALLEv? queries to check for measurement errors. An
example error is "2204, Low signal amplitude".
NOTE. If Trigger View is active, scan mode is in effect, or the display format set to
XY, this query generates event 221 (Settings conflict) and returns 9.9E37.
NOTE. When math is FFT, turned on, and used as a measurement source,
attempting to query the measurement value returns 9.9e37 and raises error 2225
(no waveform to measure).
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:VALUE might return 28.75E6 if measurement number
three is frequency.
MEASUrement:SNAPSHOT (No Query Form)
Sets the measurement snapshot feature.
Conditions
2-150
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:SNAPSHOT
MEASUrement:SNAPSOUrce
Sets or returns the snapshot source.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:SNAPSOUrce { CH1 | CH2 | MATH }
MEASUrement:SNAPSOUrce?
*OPC
Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
The *OPC? query places the ASCII character "1" into the output queue when all
such OPC commands are complete. The *OPC? response is not available to read
until all pending operations finish. (See page 3-224, Status and Events.)
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope
with your application program. (See page 3-7, Synchronization Methods.)
Certain oscilloscope operations can affect the *OPC response. (See Table 3-3
on page 3-7.)
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*OPC
*OPC?
Related Commands
Examples
BUSY?, *WAI
*OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of
all pending OPC operations.
*OPC? might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-151
Command Descriptions
PICTBridge:DATEPRINT
Sets the date and time to be printed on the hard copy if the feature is available
on the compatible printer. This command is equivalent to setting the Date Print
option in the UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu
of TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:DATEPRINT { DEFLT | OFF | ON }
PICTBridge:DATEPRINT?
Arguments
DEFLT will match the default setting of the printer: on or off.
ON prints the date and time on the hard copy.
OFF does not print the date and time.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT? might return ON if the printer is set to print the date
and time.
PICTBridge:DEF (No Query Form)
Sets the arguments for all PictBridge commands to their default values. The
default values are the same as the default settings for the printer. This command is
equivalent to setting all the options to default in the UTILITY > Options > Printer
Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu of TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
NOTE. The HARDCopy:BUTTON, HARDCopy:INKSaver, and
HARDCopy:LAYOUT commands apply to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
Conditions
Group
2-152
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only.
PictBridge
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Examples
PICTBridge:DEF
PICTBRIDGE:DEF sets the parameters for the compatible printer to the default
values.
PICTBridge:IDPRINT
Sets the oscilloscope model and serial number to be printed on the hard copy if
the feature is available on the compatible printer. This command is equivalent
to setting the ID Print option in the UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup >
PRINT Button > Prints menu of TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:IDPRINT { DEFLT | OFF | ON }
PICTBridge:IDPRINT?
Arguments
DEFLT will match the default setting of the printer: on or off.
ON prints the model and serial number on the hard copy.
OFF does not print the model and serial number.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT? might return ON if the printer is set to print the model
and serial number.
PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE
Sets the size of the image to print. This command is equivalent to setting the
Image Size option in the UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button
> Prints menu of TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, and TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-153
Command Descriptions
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE { DEFLT | IN2P5BY3P25 | L | IN4BY6 |
L2 | IN8BY10 | L4 | E | CARD | HAGAKIPC | CM6BY8 | CM7BY10
| CM9BY13 | CM10BY15 | CM13BY18 | CM15BY21 | CM18BY24 | A4
| LETTER }
PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE?
Arguments
DEFLT specifies the default size of the image to print.
All image size arguments are valid if the paper size can accommodate the image.
The paper size should be larger than the image size.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE? might return LETTER as the size of the image to print.
PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE
Sets the paper size of the hard copy from those available on the compatible
printer. This command is equivalent to setting the Paper Size option in the
UTILITY > Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu of
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE { DEFLT | L | L2 | HAGAKIPCARD |
MM54BY86 | MM100BY150 | IN4BY6 | IN8BY10 | LETTER | IN11BY17
| A0 | A1 | A2 | A3 | A4 | A5 | A6 | A7 | A8 | A9 | B0 |
B1 | B2 | B3 | B4 | B5 | B6 | B7 | B8 | B9 | ROLL89MM |
ROLL127MM | ROLL100MM | ROLL210MM }
PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE?
Arguments
DEFLT specifies the default paper size of the printer.
Any paper size argument is valid when the paper is available for the printer.
Examples
2-154
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE? might return LETTER as the selected paper size for
the printer.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE
Sets the type of paper from those available on the compatible printer. This
command is equivalent to setting the Paper Type option in the UTILITY > Options
> Printer Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu of TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B oscilloscopes.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE { DEFLT | PLAIN | PHOTO | FASTPHOTO}
PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE?
Arguments
Examples
DEFLT specifies the type of paper used by default in the printer.
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE might return PLAIN as the paper type.
PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL
Sets the quality of the print from those available on the compatible printer. This
command is equivalent to setting the Print Quality option in the UTILITY >
Options > Printer Setup > PRINT Button > Prints menu of TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B
oscilloscopes.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL { DEFLT | NRMAL | FINE | DRAFT }
PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL?
Arguments
DEFLT specifies the quality of the hard copy used by default on the printer.
NRMAL prints a normal quality hard copy.
FINE prints a high quality hard copy.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-155
Command Descriptions
DRAFT prints a low quality hard copy.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL? might return DRAFT as the quality of the print.
POWer? (Query Only)
Returns the current POWer measurement settings.
Group
Power and Battery-Related
Syntax
POWer?
Examples
POWER? might return the following: POWER:AC:PRESENT
1;:POWER:BATTERY1:GASGAUGE 0 ;STATUS
NOTINSTALLED;:POWER:BATTERY2:GASGAUGE 0 ;STATUS
NOTINSTALLED;:POWER:BATTERIES:TIME 0; POWER:BUTTONLIGHT 1
POWer:AC:PRESENt? (Query Only)
Returns a statement indicating whether the oscilloscope is being powered by
battery or AC.
Group
Power and Battery-Related
Syntax
POWer:AC:PRESENt?
Returns
0 if the oscilloscope is being powered by battery. 1 if the oscilloscope is being
powered by AC.
Examples
POWER:AC:PRESENT? might return 0, specifying that the oscilloscope is being
powered by its battery.
POWer:BATTERY<x>:GASgauge? (Query Only)
Returns the amount of charge remaining in Battery x, where x is Battery 1 or
Battery 2.
This command is valid only if POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS? returns
NORMAL.
2-156
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Power and Battery-Related
Syntax
POWer:BATTERY<x>:GASgauge?
Returns
Examples
<NR1>, a number between 0 and 100, indicates the charge remaining in the
battery. 0 indicates the battery is fully discharged. 100 indicates the battery
is fully charged.
POWER:BATTERY1:GASGAUGE? might return 60, specifying that battery 1 is
60% charged.
POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS? (Query Only)
Returns the status of battery x, where x is Battery 1 or Battery 2.
Group
Power and Battery-Related
Syntax
POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS?
Returns
FULL indicates that the battery is fully charged.
DISCHARGED indicates that the battery has no charge remaining. The battery can
be discharged, but still report a small percent remaining.
UNCALIBRATED indicates that the oscilloscope cannot predict the battery charge
remaining.
NOTINSTALLED indicates that the battery is not installed in the oscilloscope.
NORMAL indicates that the battery status is not any of the states in this list.
Examples
POWER:BATTERY1:STATUS? might return FULL, which indicates that Battery 1 is
at maximum capacity.
POWer:BATTERIES:TIME? (Query Only)
Returns the charge remaining in both batteries. This value is not accurate when
either battery is uncalibrated.
Group
Power and Battery-Related
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-157
Command Descriptions
Syntax
POWer:BATTERIES:TIME?
Returns
<NR1> specifies the operating time remaining for both batteries in minutes.
Examples
POWER:BATTERIES:TIME? might return 10, specifying that the battery or
batteries installed can provide about 10 minutes of power to the oscilloscope.
POWer:BUTTONLIGHT
Turns the lights on the front-panel buttons of the TPS2000 Series and TPS2000B
Series on and off.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000 Series and TPS2000B Series only.
Group
Power and Battery-Related
Syntax
POWer:BUTTONLIGHT <NR1> | ON | OFF
POWer:BUTTONLIGHT?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns the lights on.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns the lights off.
Examples
POWER:BUTTONLIGHT ON sets the front-panel button lights to on.
POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces
Sets or queries the Power Analysis sources. This command is equivalent to setting
the Sources option in the Power Analysis menu. It does not affect the sources for
any customer-visible PI measurements.
Conditions
2-158
This command applies to the TPS2000 Series and TPS2000B Series only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces { CH1CH2 | CH3CH4 }
POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
CH1CH2 selects Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the power analysis source.
CH3CH4 selects Channel 3 and Channel 4 as the power analysis source.
NOTE. The "CH3CH4" argument is only valid for instruments with four channels.
Examples
POWERANALYSIS:SOURCES CH1CH2 specifies Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the
power analysis source.
POWERANALYSIS:SOURCES? might return CH1CH2.
*PSC (No Query Form)
Sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the automatic power-on
handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the
DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at
power on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER, SRER, and
ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off
and are restored at power on. Refer to the Status and Events section for more
information.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*PSC <NR1>
*PSC?
Related Commands
Arguments
DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST
<NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power on clear,
and allows the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power on.
<NR1> ≠ 0 sets the power-on status clear flag true. Sending *PSC 1, therefore,
enables the power-on status clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on.
Examples
*PSC 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false.
*PSC? might return the value 1, showing that the power-on status clear flag
is set to true.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-159
Command Descriptions
*RCL (No Query Form)
Restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of its settings stored in memory.
(The settings are stored using the *SAV command.) This command is equivalent
to RECAll:SETUp, and performs the same function as the Recall Saved Setup
item in the front-panel Save/Recall Setup menu.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
*RCL <NR1>
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV
<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 Series), or 1 to 10 (
TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series), and specifies
a setup storage location.
*RCL 3 restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory
location 3.
RECAll:SETUp (No Query Form)
Restores a stored or factory front-panel setup of the oscilloscope from internal
nonvolatile memory, or from a file on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only). When used with the FACTORY argument, this command is equivalent to
pushing the DEFAULT SETUP front-panel button.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
RECAll:SETUp { FACtory | <NR1> | <file path> }
Related Commands
Arguments
FACtory, *RCL, *RST, *SAV
FACtory selects the factory setup.
<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 Series), or from 1 to
10 (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
2-160
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series), and specifies
a setup storage location.
<file path> (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000C, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is a
quoted string that defines the location and name of the setup file to recall from
the CompactFlash card or the USB flash drive. If you do not specify a path to the
folder, the TDS2MEM looks for the file in the current working folder. The current
folder refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
Examples
RECALL:SETUP FACTORY recalls the oscilloscope setup to its factory defaults.
RECALL:SETUP "A:\TSTSETUP\PRTST01.SET" recalls the oscilloscope
settings from the file PRTST01.SET file on the CompactFlash card
(TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series only).
RECAll:WAVEForm (No Query Form)
Recalls a stored waveform from the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or from the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only) into a reference location.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C_EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
RECAll:WAVEForm <file path>,REF<x>
Related Commands
Arguments
SAVe:WAVEform
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the location and name of the
waveform file to recall. If you do not specify a path to the folder, the oscilloscope
looks for the file in the current working folder. The current folder refers to the
name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
REF<x> is the oscilloscope reference memory location in which to load the
waveform. You must load a saved waveform into a reference memory location
before displaying the waveform.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-161
Command Descriptions
Examples
RECALL:WAVEFORM "A:\TST-PRD\TST-01.CSV", REFC loads the waveform
file TST-01.CSV into reference memory RefC. Then use SELect:REFC to display
this waveform.
REM (No Query Form)
Specifies a comment. This line is ignored by the oscilloscope.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
REM <QString>
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a string that can have a maximum of 80 characters.
REM "This is a comment" is ignored by the oscilloscope.
RS232? (Query Only)
Returns the RS232 settings.
Group
RS-232
Syntax
RS232?
Returns
Examples
The current RS-232 settings.
RS232? might return the following string: RS232:BAUD 9600; SOFTFLAGGING
0; HARDFLAGGING 1; PARITY NONE; TRANSMIT:TERMINATOR LF
RS232:BAUd
Sets or queries the RS-232C interface transmission speed. If no flow control
(flagging) is used, commands may be received faster than the oscilloscope can
process them. Also, if another command is sent immediately after this command,
without waiting for the baud rate to be programmed, the first couple of characters
may be lost.
2-162
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Conditions
This command applies to the TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
RS-232
Syntax
RS232:BAUd <NR1>
RS232:BAUd?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> which can be 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200.
RS232:BAUD 9600 sets the transmission rate to 9600 baud.
RS232:HARDFlagging
Sets or queries the state of RS232 hard flagging. When hard flagging is enabled,
the oscilloscope sends data if CTS (Clear To Send) is asserted. When receiving
data, the oscilloscope asserts RTS (Request To Send) until the input buffer is
almost full. When the oscilloscope no longer asserts RTS, it continues to read
incoming data until the input buffer is full and then reports an input overrun
error. The oscilloscope asserts DTR (Data Terminal Ready) at all times when
the oscilloscope power is on.
Hard flagging and soft flagging cannot be on at the same time. However, hard and
soft flagging can both be off at the same time. Turning hard flagging on turns soft
flagging off. Turning soft flagging on turns hard flagging off.
Conditions
This command applies to the TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
RS-232
Syntax
RS232:HARDFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
RS232:HARDFlagging?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 activates hard flagging and turns off soft flagging.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 deactivates hard flagging (RTS always asserted).
Examples
RS232:HARDFLAGGING ON activates hard flagging and deactivates soft flagging.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-163
Command Descriptions
RS232:PARity
Sets or queries the parity used for all RS-232C data transfers. When parity is odd
or even, the oscilloscope generates the selected parity on output and checks all
input against the selected parity. When parity is none, the oscilloscope performs
no input parity error checks and generates no output parity.
When the parity (ninth) bit does not match the parity type, the oscilloscope reports
a parity error. If another command is sent immediately after this command,
without waiting for the parity to be programmed, the first few characters may be
lost.
Conditions
This command applies to the TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and
TPS1000B Series only.
Group
RS-232
Syntax
RS232:PARity { EVEN | ODD | NONe }
RS232:PARity?
Arguments
EVEN sets even parity.
ODD sets odd parity.
NONe sets no parity (no ninth bit transmitted).
Examples
RS232:PARITY EVEN sets even parity.
RS232:SOFTFlagging
Sets or queries the input and output soft flagging over the RS-232C port. After
receiving an XOFF (DC3), the oscilloscope sends two or less characters. The
oscilloscope begins transmitting data again when it receives an XON (DC1)
character.
The oscilloscope sends an XOFF character when its input buffer is running out of
space. After sending an XOFF character it can receive at least 20 more bytes. It
sends XON when its input buffer has an acceptable number of free bytes.
When soft flagging is enabled and binary data is transferred, data transmission
will lock up if the data contains XOFF or XON characters.
Hard flagging and soft flagging cannot be active at the same time. However, hard
and soft flagging can both be inactive at the same time. Activating soft flagging
deactivates hard flagging. Activating hard flagging deactivates soft flagging.
2-164
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Conditions
This command applies to the TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
RS-232
Syntax
RS232:SOFTFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
RS232:SOFTFlagging?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 activates soft flagging and deactivates hard flagging.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 deactivates soft flagging.
Examples
RS232:SOFTFLAGGING ON activates soft flagging and deactivates hard flagging.
RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator
Sets or queries the end-of-line (EOL) terminator. When transmitting, the
oscilloscope appends the terminator to the end of each message. When receiving,
the oscilloscope accepts all four terminators, regardless of the currently selected
terminator. When a combination of multiple characters is selected (CRLF or
LFCR), the oscilloscope interprets the first character as the terminator; it treats the
second character as a null command.
CR represents an ASCII carriage return character (0x0D) and LF represents an
ASCII line feed character (0x0A).
Conditions
This command applies to the TDS2000, TDS1000, TDS200, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
RS-232
Syntax
RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator { CR | LF | CRLf | LFCr }
RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator?
Arguments
CR selects the carriage return character as the EOL terminator.
LF selects the line feed character as the EOL terminator.
CRLf selects the carriage return and line feed characters as the EOL terminator.
LFCr selects the line feed and carriage return characters as the EOL terminator.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-165
Command Descriptions
Examples
RS232:TRANSMIT:TERMINATOR CR sets the carriage return as the EOL
terminator.
*RST
(Reset) Returns the oscilloscope to a known set of oscilloscope settings, but does
not purge any stored settings. This command executes a subset of the FACtory
command.
Sending the *RST command does the following:
Returns the oscilloscope settings to the factory defaults (refer to Appendix
B: Factory Setup)
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a zero-length field
Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations
The *RST command does not change the following items:
State of the RS-232, GPIB, or USB interface
Calibration data that affects device specifications
Current GPIB oscilloscope address
Stored settings or waveforms
Output queue
Service Request Enable Register settings
Standard Event Status Enable Register settings
Power-On Status Clear flag setting
Hard copy parameters
Response Header Enable State
Front panel LOCK state
Verbose State
Display Brightness, TPS2000B and TPS2000 Series only
Display Contrast (TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, and TPS2000 Series
only)
2-166
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*RST
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Related Commands
FACtory, *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
*SAV (No Query Form)
Saves the state of the oscilloscope into a specified nonvolatile memory location.
You can later use the *RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved
state. This is equivalent to selecting the Save Setup option in the Save/Recall
Setup menu.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
*SAV <NR1>
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FACtory, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp
<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 Series) or from 1
to 10 (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series) and specifies
a memory location. Any settings that have been stored previously at this location
are overwritten.
*SAV 2 saves the settings in memory location 2.
SAVe:IMAge (No Query Form)
Saves the screen image to a file on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only).
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:IMAge <file path>
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-167
Command Descriptions
Arguments
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the path and name of the screen
image file to save. Use file name extensions that are appropriate for image format.
If you do not specify a path to a folder, the oscilloscope saves the screen image file
in the current working folder, using the current save image file format. The current
folder refers to the name of a folder as returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
Use the SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat command to set the screen image graphical
file format.
Examples
SAVE:IMAGE "A:\PROD-TST\VID-EVAL.BMP" saves the screen image to the
file VID-EVAL.BMP in the folder A:\PROD-TST on the CompactFlash card
(TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series only).
SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat (No Query Form)
Sets the screen image file format used by the SAVe:IMAGE command and by
the SAVE > Action > Save Image and SAVE > Action > Save All front-panel
operations.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
For non-TBS1000B/EDU Series. SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat {BMP |
EPSIMAGE | JPG | PCX | RLE | TIFF}
For TBS1000B/EDU Series. SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat {BMP | JPG }
Arguments
BMP sets the screen image file format to Microsoft Windows Bitmap format.
EPSIMAGE (non-TBS1000B/EDU Series only) sets the screen image file format to
Postscript format.
JPG (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series only) sets the screen image file format to JPEG bitmap (uses a
lossy file compression algorithm).
PCX (non-TBS1000B/EDU Series only) sets the screen image file format to DOS
Paintbrush format.
2-168
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
RLE (non-TBS1000B/EDU Series only) sets the screen image file format to
Windows color image file format (*.RLE). Use RLE for faster transfer rates and
smaller resulting files. Many programs that recognize .BMP files also recognize
.RLE files.
TIFF (non-TBS1000B/EDU Series only) sets the screen image file format to
Tagged Image File Format.
Examples
SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT TIFF sets the screen image graphical file format
to TIFF.
SAVe:SETUp (No Query Form)
Saves the current state of the oscilloscope into the specified nonvolatile
memory location, or to a file on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only). This is equivalent to selecting the Save Setup option in the Save/Recall
Setup menu.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:SETUp {<NR1> | <file path>}
Related Commands
Arguments
RECAll:SETUp, *RCL
<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 1 to 5 (TDS200 Series), or 1 to
10 (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series), and specifies
a memory location. Any settings that have been stored previously at this location
are overwritten.
<file path> (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is
a quoted string that defines the path and name of the setup file to save. Use the
extension .SET for oscilloscope setup file names.
If you do not specify a path to a folder, the TDS2MEM saves the setup file in
the current working folder. The current folder refers to the name of a folder as
returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-169
Command Descriptions
Examples
SAVE:SETUP 5 saves the current front-panel setup to memory location 5.
SAVE:SETUP "A:\PROD-TST\VID-EVAL.SET" saves the oscilloscope settings
to the file VID-EVAL.SET in the folder A:\PROD-TST on the CompactFlash
card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the USB flash
drive (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
and TDS1000B Series only).
SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form)
Stores a waveform in one of the nonvolatile reference memory locations, or to
a file on the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series
only), or on the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only). This command is
equivalent to selecting the Save Waveform option in the Save/Recall Waveform
menu.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>, {REF<x> | <file path>}
Arguments
<wfm> is CH<y> (one of the allowable channels) or MATH. This is the waveform
that will be saved. For TBS1000B/EDU models, <wfm> can be FFT. For
TDS2MEM module and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series, <wfm> can also be a
reference waveform location (for example REF4) if the destination is <file path>.
REF<x> is one of the allowable reference waveform storage locations.
<file path> (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) is a
quoted string that defines the path and name of the waveform file to save on the
CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on the
USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series only). Use the extension .CSV for saved
waveform files. Waveform data is saved as self-documented comma-separated
ASCII values.
If you do not specify a path to a folder, the TDS2MEM creates the waveform file
in the current working folder. The current folder refers to the name of a folder as
returned by the FILESystem:CWD query.
Examples
SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH, REFB saves the math waveform in stored waveform
memory location REFB.
For non-TBS1000B/EDU models:
2-170
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
SAVE:WAVEFORM CH1, "A:\PROD-TST\FRQTST03.CSV" saves the channel 1
waveform data to the file FRQTST03.CSV in the folder A:\PROD-TST on the
CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or on
the USB flash drive (TBS1000, TDS200C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and
TDS1000B Series only).
For TBS1000B/EDU models:
SAVE:WAVEFORM CH1, "/usb0/PROD-TST/FRQTST03.CSV" saves the channel
1 waveform data to the file FRQTST03.CSV in the folder /usb0/PROD-TST
on the USB flash drive.
SELect? (Query Only)
Returns the display status of all waveforms.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect?
Returns
Examples
Waveform display status
SELECT? returns SELECT:CH1 0;CH2 1;MATH 1;REFA 0;REFB 1, for
2-channel models with CH2, Math and REFB waveforms displayed
SELECT? returns SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1;MATH 0;REFA
1;REFB 0;REFC 0;REFD 1, for 4-channel models with CH1 through
CH4 displayed, Math disabled, REFA displayed, and REFD displayed.
For the TBS1000B/EDU, SELECT? might return: SELECT:FFT 0;CH1 1;CH2
1;MATH 0;REFA 0;REFB 0
SELect:<wfm>
Controls the display of waveforms. This command is equivalent to activating or
deactivating a waveform from the oscilloscope front panel.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:<wfm> { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
SELect:<wfm>?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-171
Command Descriptions
Arguments
OFF or <NR1> = 0 deactivates the display of the specified waveform.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 activates the display of the specified waveform.
<wfm> can be CH<x>, MATH, or REF<y>.
Examples
SELECT:CH2 ON displays channel 2.
SELECT:REFA? returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the REFA waveform
is displayed.
SELect:FFT
Sets or queries the FFT display state.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
FFT
Syntax
SELect:FFT
SELect:FFT?
SET? (Query Only)
Returns most oscilloscope settings. You can send these responses back to the
oscilloscope to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you sent SET.
This query is identical to the *LRN? query.
NOTE. The SET? query always returns command headers, regardless of the
setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned data is intended
to be able to be sent back to the oscilloscope as concatenated commands. The
VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers
should be abbreviated or full length.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
SET?
Related Commands
2-172
HEADer, *LRN?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Returns
Examples
Most oscilloscope settings. See Appendix B: Factory Setup.
SET? might return a partial string like the following: ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER
RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE; NUMAVG 16;:HEADER
1;:VERBOSE 1;:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE
500.0E-3;CONTRAST 50;:LOCK NONE;:HARDCOPY:FORMAT EPSON;PORT
RS232;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;
*SRE (No Query Form)
(Service Request Enable) sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable
Register (SRER). Refer to the Status and Events section for more information.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*SRE <NR1>
*SRE?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, FACtory, *PSC
<NR1> is an integer value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of the SRER
are set according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution
error. The power-on default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER
maintains its value through a power cycle.
*SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to 00110000 binary.
*SRE? might return a value of 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the
binary value 00100000.
*STB? (Query Only)
(Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register (SBR)
using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. Refer to the Status and Events
section for more information.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*STB?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-173
Command Descriptions
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, FACtory
<NR1>
*STB? might return the value 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary
value 01100000.
SWLoss?
Returns the current Switching Loss measurement settings.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss?
Examples
SWLOSS? might return the following: SWLOSS:ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS;ENABLE
ON;SOURCES CH1CH2;STOPAFTER 10 ;TONSTART 90;TONEND
10;TOFFSTART 10;TOFFEND 10;VSAT 4.300000190735E0;UNITS WATTS
SWLoss:ACQuire
Sets or queries the type of acquisition used for Switching Loss measurements.
Conditions
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:ACQuire { STOPAfter | CONTINUOUS }
SWLoss:ACQuire?
Arguments
2-174
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
STOPAfter instructs the oscilloscope to perform measurements on N acquisitions
and then stop.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
CONTINUOUS instructs the oscilloscope to continuously acquire waveforms and
display measurements.
Examples
SWLOSS:ACQUIRE might return SWLOSS:ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS, indicating that
the oscilloscope is continuously taking switching loss measurements.
SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION? (Query Only)
Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is conducting in
its on state. The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg. column of the
Switching Loss display.
You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the
SWLoss:VSAT command.
NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the Switching Loss
menu is not active.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:AVERAGE:CONDUCTION? might return 6.0880498608E-2.
SWLoss:AVErage:N? (Query Only)
Returns the number of measurements used to calculate the AVG. (averaged)
measurement value for switching loss measurements.
NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the Switching Loss
menu is not active.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-175
Command Descriptions
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:AVErage:N?
Returns
Examples
<NR1>
SWLOSS:AVERAGE:N? might return 185, indicating that the oscilloscope used
185 measurements to calculate the average.
SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL? (Query Only)
Returns the sum of the Turn-On, Turn-Off, and Conduction switching losses.
The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg column of the Switching
Loss display.
NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the Switching Loss
menu is not active.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TOTAL? might return 9.1715589532E-2.
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF? (Query Only)
Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning
between its on and off state. The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg
column of the Switching Loss display.
You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the
SWLoss:VSAT command.
2-176
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the Switching Loss
menu is not active.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TURNOFF? might return 1.3790115628E-2.
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON? (Query Only)
Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning
between its off and on state. The oscilloscope reports this measurement in the Avg
column of the Switching Loss display.
You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using the
SWLoss:VSAT command.
NOTE. This command returns error 221 (settings conflict) if the Switching Loss
menu is not active.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:AVERAGE:TURNON? might return 1.698264356E-2.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-177
Command Descriptions
SWLoss:ENABLe
Sets or queries the switching loss menu, on or off.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:ENABLe { ON | OFF }
SWLoss:ENABLe?
Arguments
ON enables the switching loss menu.
OFF disables the switching loss menu.
Examples
SWLOSS:ENABLE ON sets the switching loss measurement to on.
SWLoss:LEVELS (No Query Form)
Returns the Switching Loss measurement levels to factory default values for the
following commands:
SWLoss:TONSTART SWLoss:TONEND SWLoss:TOFFSTART
SWLoss:TOFFEND
Conditions
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:LEVELS { DEFault }
Arguments
Examples
2-178
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
DEFault sets Switching Loss measurement levels to default values.
SWLOSS:LEVELS DEFAULT returns Switching Loss measurement levels to default
values.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION? (Query Only)
Returns the Conduction Loss for the switching loss measurement specified by
the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.
NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX?
command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss:AVErage:N?
This indicates that insufficient measurements have been taken to generate a log
report.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:LOG:CONDUCTION? might return 6.0524113476E-2.
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX
Sets or queries which measurement to return for the following
commands: SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION, SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL,
SWLoss:LOG:TURNON, and SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF.
NOTE. The SWLoss:AVErage:N command returns the number of measurements
currently accumulated in the log.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX <NR1>
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-179
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> The default value is 1.
SWLOSS:LOG:INDEX? might return 5.
SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL? (Query Only)
Returns the Total Loss for a switching loss measurement specified by the
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.
NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX?
command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss:AVErage:N?
This indicates that insufficient measurements have been taken to generate a log
report.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:LOG:TOTAL? might return 9.0796045959E-2.
SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF? (Query Only)
Returns the Turn-Off Loss for a switching loss measurement specified by the
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.
NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX?
command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss:AVErage:N?
This indicates that insufficient measurements have been taken to generate a log
report.
Conditions
2-180
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:LOG:TURNOFF? might return 1.3477193192E-2.
SWLoss:LOG:TURNON? (Query Only)
Returns the Turn-On Loss for a switching loss measurement specified by the
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX command.
NOTE. The oscilloscope generates error 221 if the SWLoss:LOG:INDEX?
command returns a number greater than that reported by SWLoss:AVErage:N?
This indicates that insufficient measurements have been taken to generate a log
report.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:LOG:TURNON? might return 1.7111644149E-2.
SWLoss:SAVE
Saves the Switching Loss measurements to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card.
Uses .CSV format.
NOTE. You can view the contents of the saved file on your personal computer. You
cannot recall saved Switching Loss files to the oscilloscope.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-181
Command Descriptions
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:SAVE <filename>
SWLoss:SAVE?
Arguments
Examples
<filename> specifies the file name and full path to save switching loss
measurement data.
SWLOSS:SAVE "A:\Data2.CSV" specifies the file name and path to save
switching loss measurement data to the oscilloscope CompactFlash card.
SWLoss:SOURCES
Sets or queries the input sources for Switching Loss measurements.
Before taking measurements, you must use the CH<x>:YUNit command to set
the units of the voltage and current sources.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:SOURCES { CH1CH2 | CH3CH4 }
SWLoss:SOURCES?
Arguments
CH1CH2 specifies Channel 1 and Channel 2 as the input sources.
CH3CH4 specifies Channel 3 and Channel 4 as the input sources.
NOTE. The "CH3CH4" argument is only valid for instruments with four channels.
Examples
2-182
SWLOSS:SOURCES? might return CH1CH2.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
SWLoss:STOPAfter
Sets or queries the number of measurements used for Switching Loss
measurement.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:STOPAfter <NR1>
SWLoss:STOPAfter?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
SWLoss:ACQuire
<NR1> defines the number of measurements you want to include.
SWLOSS:STOPAFTER? might return 15, indicating that the oscilloscope will take
fifteen measurements and stop.
SWLoss:TOFFEND
Sets or queries a level on the first falling edge of the current waveform that occurs
after the turn-off start point (SWLoss:TOFFSTART).
The Turn-Off loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math
waveform between the turn-off start (SWLoss:TOFFSTART) and turn-off end
(SWLoss:TOFFEND) points.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:TOFFEND <NR1>
SWLoss:TOFFEND?
Related Commands
SWLoss:TOFFSTART
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-183
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> in percent. Default value is 10.
SWLOSS:TOFFEND? might return 10, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-off
End is set to 10%.
SWLoss:TONEND
Sets or queries a level on the first falling edge of the voltage waveform.
The Turn-On loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math
waveform between the turn-on start (SWLoss:TONSTART) and turn-on end
(SWLoss:TONEND) points.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:TONEND <NR1>
SWLoss:TONEND?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> in percent. Default value is 10.
SWLOSS:TONEND? might return 10, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-off Start
is set to 10%.
SWLoss:TOFFSTART
Sets or queries a level on the rising edge of the voltage waveform.
The Turn-Off loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math
waveform between the turn-off start (SWLoss:TOFFSTART) and turn-off end
(SWLoss:TOFFEND) points.
Conditions
Group
2-184
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Power Measurement
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
SWLoss:TOFFSTART <NR1>
SWLoss:TOFFSTART?
<NR1> in percent. Default value is 10.
SWLOSS:TOFFSTART? might return 10, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-on
End is set to 10%.
SWLoss:TONSTART
Sets or queries a level on the falling edge of the voltage waveform.
The Turn-On loss measurement is calculated by integrating the math
waveform between the turn-on start (SWLoss:TONSTART) and turn-on end
(SWLoss:TONEND) points.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:TONSTART <NR1>
SWLoss:TONSTART?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> in percent. Default value is 90.
SWLOSS:TONSTART? might return 80, indicating that Switching Loss Turn-on
Start is set to 80%.
SWLoss:UNITs
Sets or queries the units for Switching Loss measurements.
Conditions
Group
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Power Measurement
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-185
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
SWLoss:UNITs { WATTS | JOULES }
SWLoss:UNITs?
WATTS sets the measurement units to Watts.
JOULES sets the measurement units to Joules.
Examples
SWLOSS:UNITS? might return WATTS, indicating that the current measurement
units are Watts.
NOTE. If the units are Watts, the trigger type must be Edge and the trigger source
must be a channel specified by SWLoss:SOURCES.
SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION?
Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is conducting in
its on state. You must enter the saturation voltage of the device under test using
the SWLoss:VSAT command.
This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does not depend of
the current oscilloscope menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION?
Examples
SWLOSS:VALUE:CONDUCTION? might return 6.0166666667E-2.
SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL? (Query Only)
Returns the sum of the Turn-On, Turn-Off, and Conduction switching losses.
This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does not depend of
the current oscilloscope menu.
Conditions
2-186
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:VALUE:TOTAL? might return -5.74759710834346E2
SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF? (Query Only)
Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning
between its on and off state. You must enter the saturation voltage of the device
under test using the SWLoss:VSAT command.
This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does not depend of
the current oscilloscope menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:VALUE:TURNOFF? might return -2.79999933043427E2
SWLoss:VALue:TURNON? (Query Only)
Returns the power loss of the device under test when the device is transitioning
between its off and on state. You must enter the saturation voltage of the device
under test using the SWLoss:VSAT command.
This command returns an immediate-measurement value that does not depend of
the current oscilloscope menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-187
Command Descriptions
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:VALue:TURNON?
Returns
Examples
<NR3>
SWLOSS:VALUE:TURNON? might return -5.19999753093395E2
SWLoss:VSAT
Sets or queries the saturation voltage for the device under test.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
SWLoss:VSAT <NR3>
SWLoss:VSAT?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the saturation voltage.
SWLOSS:VSAT might return 4.800000667572E0, indicating that the saturation
voltage is set to 4.80 volts.
TIMe
Sets or queries the oscilloscope time value. The oscilloscope uses the time and
date values to time stamp files saved to the CompactFlash card (TDS2MEM and
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only), or to the USB flash drive (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
only), as well as show the time and date on the oscilloscope display.
Conditions
Group
2-188
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2MEM, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Miscellaneous
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
TIMe <QString>
TIMe?
<QString> is a time in the form "hh:mm:ss", based on a 24-hour clock (00:00:00
through 23:59:59).
TIME "14:45:00" sets the time to 2:45 pm.
TRENDPLOT? (Query Only)
Returns all the trend plot parameters.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT?
TRENDPLOT:STATE
Sets or returns the running state of the trend plot.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:STATE { RUN | STOP }
TRENDPLOT:STATE?
TRENDPLOT:TIME
Returns the elapsed time since starting the plot function.
Conditions
Group
TBS1000B models only.
Trend plot
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-189
Command Descriptions
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TIME?
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:AVG? (Query Only)
Queries the current statistical average value. Returns the average value of all
acquisred measured value corresponding to the channel x, which is either 1 or 2.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:AVG?
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MAX? (Query Only)
Queries the current statistical maximum value. Returns the maximum value of all
acquired measured value corresponding the selected channel. x is either 1 or 2.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MAX?
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MIN? (Query Only)
Queries the current statistical minimum value. Returns the minimum value of all
acquired measured value corresponding the selected channel. x is either 1 or 2.
Conditions
2-190
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MIN?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALE? (Query Only)
Queries the current per div scale.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALE?
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMAX? (Query Only)
Queries the maximum value to plot of the display in the current range.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMAX?
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMIN? (Query Only)
Queries the minimum value to plot of the display in the current range.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMIN?
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SOURCE
Sets or returns the trend plot source.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-191
Command Descriptions
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SOURCE { CH1 | CH2 | MATH | CH1CH2 | CH2CH1
| CH1MATH | MATHCH1 | CH2MATH | MATHCH2 }
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SOURCE?
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:TYPe
Sets or returns the trend plot type. z is 1 or 2.
Conditions
TBS1000B models only.
Group
Trend plot
Syntax
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:TYPe { CRMs | FALL | FREQuency | MAXImum |
MEAN | MINImum | NONe | NWIdth | PERIod | PK2pk | PWIdth |
RISe | RMS | CURSORRms | PDUTy | PHAse | DELAYRR | DELAYRF |
DELAYFR | DELAYFF | AMplitude | CMEAN | High | LOW | NDUty |
POVERshoot | NOVERshoot | CURSORMean | BURSTWIDth | AREA |
CAREA | PPULSECount | NPULSECount | REDGECount | FEDGECount
}
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:TYPe?
*TRG (No Query Form)
(Trigger) Executes commands that are defined by *DDT.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TRG
Examples
*TRG immediately executes all commands defined by *DDT.
TRIGger
Forces a trigger event to occur. When used as a query, TRIGger? returns the
current trigger settings.
Group
2-192
Trigger
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger FORCe
TRIGger?
FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is REAdy, the acquisition
will complete; otherwise this command will be ignored. This is equivalent to
selectingFORCE TRIGon the front panel.
TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur.
TRIGGER? might return the following string: TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE
AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0E0;HOLDOFF:VALUE
5.0E-7;:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE
RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC FIELD;POLARITY
NORMAL
TRIGger:MAIn
Sets the oscilloscope trigger level to 50% of the minimum and maximum values
of the signal. Returns the current main trigger settings when used as a query.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn SETLevel
TRIGger:MAIn?
Arguments
SETLevel sets the main trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX
amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent to pressing the
front-panel SET LEVEL TO 50% button.
If the oscilloscope acquisition state is STOP and you send TRIGger:MAIn
SETLevel, the oscilloscope ignores the command and generates event 221
(Settings conflict).
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN SETLEVEL sets the main trigger level mid way between MAX
and MIN.
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE? (Query Only)
Returns the trigger coupling, source, and slope settings for the edge trigger.
Group
Trigger
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-193
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Returns
Examples
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?
Trigger coupling, source, and slope settings for the main edge trigger
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE? might return SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE
RISE
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger. This is equivalent to
setting the Coupling option in the Trigger menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling { AC | DC | HFRej | LFRej |
NOISErej }
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling?
Arguments
AC selects AC trigger coupling.
DC selects DC coupling.
HFRej coupling removes the high-frequency components of the DC signal.
LFRej coupling removes the low-frequency components of the AC signal.
NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity. It requires added signal amplitude for
more stable, less false triggering.
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COUPLING DC sets the main edge trigger coupling to DC.
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe
Selects a rising or falling slope for the edge trigger. This is equivalent to setting
the Slope option in the Trigger menu.
2-194
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe { FALL | RISe }
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE RISE sets the main edge trigger to occur on the
rising slope.
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or queries the source for the edge trigger. This is equivalent to setting the
Source option in the Trigger menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce { CH<x> | EXT | EXT5 | EXT10 | AC
LINE }
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one of the allowable input channels. The value of <x> can
vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel
instruments.
EXT specifies the external input (not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes).
EXT5 specifies that the external input is attenuated by a factor of 5 (not available
with TDS224 oscilloscopes).
EXT10 specifies that the external input is attenuated by a factor of 10
(TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only).
AC LINE specifies the power line signal as a trigger source (not available with
TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series oscilloscopes).
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the edge trigger
source.
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE? might return CH2 for the edge trigger source.
TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency? (Query Only)
Returns the edge or pulse width trigger frequency. This is the same as the readout
in the lower right corner of the screen.
If the trigger frequency is less than 10 Hz, the query returns 9.9e37 and generates
error 2207 (Measurement error, Measurement overflow).
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-195
Command Descriptions
If the trigger type is video, the query returns 9.9e37 and generates event 221
(Settings conflict).
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency?
Returns
Examples
Edge or pulse width trigger frequency
TRIGGER:MAIN:FREQUENCY? might return TRIGGER:MAIN:FREQUENCY
1.0E3
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff? (Query Only)
Returns the trigger holdoff value.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?
Returns
Examples
Main trigger holdoff value
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF? might return TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE
5.0E-7
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue
Sets or queries the oscilloscope trigger holdoff value.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue <NR3>
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue?
Arguments
2-196
<NR3> is the main trigger holdoff value. The range is 500 ns to 10 s.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 10 sets the holdoff value to 10 s.
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel
Sets the oscilloscope edge (all models) and pulse width (TBS1000B/EDU,
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000,
TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) trigger level. This command is
equivalent to adjusting the front-panel TRIGGER LEVEL knob.
NOTE. When the edge trigger source is set to AC LINE, the oscilloscope ignores
the set form of the command and generates event 221 (Settings conflict).
When the edge trigger source is set to AC LINE, the query form of the command
returns zero.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel <NR3>
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> the main trigger level, in volts.
TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL might return 1.4, indicating that the main edge trigger is
set to 1.4 V.
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe
Sets or queries the trigger mode for the Edge (all models) and Pulse width
(TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only) trigger
types.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe { AUTO | NORMal }
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe?
Related Commands
ACQuire:STOPAfter
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-197
Command Descriptions
Arguments
AUTO generates a trigger if a trigger is not detected within a specific time period.
AUTO also enables scan mode for sweep speeds of 100 ms/div and slower.
NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO specifies that a trigger event is automatically
generated.
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse? (Query Only)
Returns the current Pulse Trigger settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE? might return the following string:
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN
EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E-3
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce
Sets or queries the source for the pulse trigger. This is equivalent to setting the
Source option in the Trigger menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce { CH<x> | EXT | EXT5 | EXT10 }
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one of the allowable input channels. The value of <x> can be 1
through 4 on four channel oscilloscopes, or 1 or 2 on two channel oscilloscopes.
EXT specifies the external input (not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes).
EXT5 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 5 (not available with
TDS224 oscilloscopes).
2-198
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
EXT10 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 10
(TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only).
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth? (Query Only)
Returns the pulse trigger width settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH? might return the following string:
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH
1.0E-3
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
Sets or queries the polarity for the pulse trigger. This is equivalent to setting the
Polarity option in the Pulse Trigger menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity { POSITIVe | NEGAtive }
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?
Arguments
POSITIVe polarity specifics pulses with a rising leading edge.
NEGAtive polarity specifies pulses with a falling leading edge.
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN
Sets or queries the trigger conditions for the pulse trigger. This is equivalent to
setting the When option in the Pulse Trigger menu.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-199
Command Descriptions
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN { EQual | NOTEqual | INside |
OUTside }
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN?
Arguments
EQual triggers on the trailing edge of pulses of the specified width.
NOTEQual triggers when a pulse trailing edge occurs before the specified width,
or a pulse continues longer than the specified width without a trailing edge.
INside < triggers on the trailing edge of any pulses that are narrower than the
specified width.
OUTside (greater than; also called time-out trigger) triggers when a pulse
continues longer that the specified width.
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth
Sets or queries the width for the pulse trigger. This is equivalent to setting the
Width option by using the Pulse Trigger menu and the TRIGGER knob.
Conditions
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth <NR3>
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth?
Arguments
Examples
2-200
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
<NR3> specifies the time, in seconds. Range is 33 ns to 10 s. Resolution varies.
Value is forced to nearest achievable value.
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WIDTH .000000123 followed by
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WIDTH? might return 1.155E-7.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe
Sets or queries the type of oscilloscope trigger. This is equivalent to setting the
Type option in the Trigger menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe { EDGE | VIDeo | PULse }
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe?
Arguments
EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through
a specified voltage level in the specified direction and is controlled by the
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE commands.
VIDeo specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified signal is found and is
controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo commands.
PULse specifies that a trigger occurs when the specified signal meets the pulse
width criteria that is controlled by the TRIGger: MAIn:PULse commands (not
available with TDS200 Series oscilloscopes).
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE might return VIDEO, indicating that the main trigger type
is a video trigger.
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo? (Query Only)
Returns the main video trigger settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO? might return TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE
CH1;SYNC FIELD;POLARITY NORMAL
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE
Sets or queries the line number for the video trigger when
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC is set to LINENUM. This is equivalent
to selecting a line number in the Trigger/Video menu.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-201
Command Descriptions
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE?
Arguments
<NR1> specifies the line number. The minimum is 1. The maximum is 525 for
Examples
The following command sequence sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video line
123:
NTSC, 625 for PAL and SECAM.
TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE VIDEO
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC LINENUM
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE 123
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity
Sets or queries the video trigger polarity. This is equivalent to selecting the
Polarity option in the Trigger/Video menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity { INVERT | NORMal }
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity?
Arguments
INVERT specifies a positive sync pulse.
NORMal specifies a negative sync pulse.
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:POLARITY NORMAL selects negative synchronization
polarity for the video trigger.
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce
Sets or queries the source for the video trigger. This is equivalent to selecting the
Source option in the Video trigger menu.
2-202
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce { CH<x> | EXT | EXT5 | EXT10 }
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one of the allowable input channels. The value of <x> can
vary from 1 through 4 for 4-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for 2-channel
instruments.
EXT specifies the external input (not available with TDS224 oscilloscopes).
EXT5 specifies the external input, attenuated by a factor of 5 (not available with
TDS224 oscilloscopes).
EXT10 specifies the external input attenuated by a factor of 10
(TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series only).
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1 selects channel 1 as the source for the
main video trigger.
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANDard
Sets or queries the video trigger standard. This is equivalent to selecting the
Standard option in the Trigger/Video menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANDard { NTSc | PAL }
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANDard?
Arguments
NTSC (default) specifies the NTSC video standard.
PAL specifies the PAL or SECAM video standard.
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STANDARD NTSC selects the NTSC standard for the
video trigger.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-203
Command Descriptions
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC
Sets or queries the type for the video trigger sync. This is equivalent to selecting
the Sync option in the Trigger/Video menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC { FIELD | LINE | ODD | EVEN |
LINENum }
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC?
Arguments
FIELD specifies that triggering occur on the vertical sync pulse.
LINE specifies that triggering occur on the horizontal sync pulse.
ODD specifies triggering on odd fields (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.).
EVEN specifies triggering on even fields (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, TPS2000B, and
TPS2000 Series only.).
LINENum sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a specific line number, which is
specified through TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE (TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000,
TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series only.).
Examples
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC FIELD selects the vertical synchronization pulse
for the video trigger sync.
TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)
Returns the current state of the triggering system.
NOTE. Accurate real time reporting of the trigger state within any single
waveform acquisition is limited by several factors, including horizontal sweep
speed, and communications and task latencies. To check for the completion of a
single sequence acquisition, use the *OPC? query.
2-204
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:STATE?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Returns
ARMED indicates that the oscilloscope is acquiring pretrigger information. All
triggers are ignored when TRIGger:STATE is ARMed.
READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and the
oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger.
TRIGGER indicates that the oscilloscope has seen a trigger and is acquiring the
posttrigger information.
AUTO indicates that the oscilloscope is in auto mode and acquires data even in
the absence of a trigger.
SAVE indicates that acquisition is stopped or that all channels are off.
SCAN indicates that the oscilloscope is in scan mode.
Examples
TRIGGER:STATE? might return READY, indicating that pretrigger data has been
acquired and the oscilloscope is waiting for a trigger.
*TST? (Query Only)
(Self-Test) Tests the GPIB interface and always returns a 0.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TST?
Returns
0
UNLock (No Query Form)
Unlocks the front panel. This command is equivalent to LOCk NONe.
NOTE. If the oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the
UNLock command has no effect. For more information refer to ANSI-IEEE Std.
488.1-1987, Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation,
section 2.8.3, on RL State descriptions.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
UNLock ALL
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-205
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
ALL specifies all front-panel buttons.
UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front-panel buttons and knobs so they can be used.
VERBose
Sets and queries the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query
responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments. This command does not
affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk).
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
VERBose { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
VERBose?
Related Commands
Arguments
HEADer, *LRN?
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 sets the Verbose state true, which returns full-length keywords
for applicable setting queries.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Verbose state false, which returns minimum-length
keywords for applicable setting queries.
Examples
VERBOSE ON sets the Verbose state true.
VERBOSE? might return the value 1, showing that the Verbose state is true.
*WAI (No Query Form)
Prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands or queries until all
pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete. This command
allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application
program. (See page 3-7, Synchronization Methods.)
The *WAI command will stop execution until certain oscilloscope operations are
complete. (See Table 3-3 on page 3-7.)
2-206
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*WAI
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Related Commands
Examples
BUSY?, *OPC
*WAI prevents the oscilloscope from executing any further commands or queries
until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce
Sets or queries the Waveform Analysis source. This command is equivalent to
setting the Sources option in the Waveform Analysis menu.
Conditions
This command applies to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series with TPS2PWR1 Power
Analysis Module only.
Group
Power Measurement
Syntax
WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce { CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH }
WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 specifies one of the input channels as the waveform
analysis source.
NOTE. The "CH3 and CH4" options are only valid for instruments with four
channels.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the analysis source.
Examples
WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOURCE CH2 specifies Channel 2 as the waveform analysis
source.
WAVFrm? (Query Only)
Returns WFMPre? and CURVe? data for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to sending WFMPre;
CURVe. If the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command is not
displayed, the oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission parameters
(BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr, ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or).
Group
Waveform
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-207
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Related Commands
Returns
WAVFrm?
CURVe, DATa:SOUrce, WFMPre?
See WFMPre? and CURVe? commands.
WFMPre? (Query Only)
Returns waveform transmission and formatting settings for the waveform
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
If the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command is not displayed, the
oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission parameters (BYT_Nr,
BIT_Nr, ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or).
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre?
Related Commands
Returns
The format of the response when the DATa:SOUrce waveform is activated is:
BYT_Nr <NR1>;BIT_Nr <NR1>;ENCdg { ASC | BIN }; BN_Fmt { RI | RP
};BYT_Or { LSB | MSB };NR_Pt <NR1>; WFID <Qstring>;PT_FMT {ENV |
Y};XINcr <NR3>; PT_Off <NR1>;XZERo <NR3>;XUNit<QString>;YMUlt
<NR3>; YZEro <NR3>;YOFF <NR3>;YUNit <QString>
WFMPre, Additional Commands for Compatibility
The set form of these additional commands is ignored. The query form generates
event messages 100 (Command Error) and 420 (Query Unterminated). These
commands are included for compatibility purposes only.
Table 2-36: Additional commands for compatibility
2-208
Command
Argument
Description
WFMPre:XMUlt
<NR3>
Horizontal (X-axis) scale
factor
WFMPre:XOFf
<NR3>
Horizontal (X-axis) offset
WFMPre:ZMUlt
<NR3>
Z-axis scale factor
WFMPre:ZOFf
<NR3>
Z-axis offset
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Table 2-36: Additional commands for compatibility (cont.)
Command
Argument
Description
WFMPre:ZUNit
<QString>
Z-axis units
WFMPre:ZZEro
<NR3>
Z-axis origin offset
WFMPre:<wfm>? (Query Only)
Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by <wfm>, if
that waveform is active or displayed. If that waveform is not active or displayed,
the query fails and the oscilloscope generates event message 420 (Query
unterminated) and 2244 (waveform requested is not active).
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:<wfm>?
Returns
Returns the response in the following format:
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;PT_FMT { ENV | Y }; XINcr <NR3>;PT_Off
<NR1>;XZEro <NR3>;XUNit <QString>; YMUlt <NR3>;YZEro <NR3>;YOFF
<NR3>;YUNit <QString>; NR_Pt <NR1>
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro
Same as WFMPre:YOFf, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope
generates error 2241.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro?
WFMPre:BIT_Nr
Sets or queries the number of bits per waveform point for the waveform to be
transferred. Changing the value of WFMPre:BIT_Nr also changes the values of
WFMPRe:BYT_Nr and DATa:WIDth.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-209
Command Descriptions
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
WFMPre:BIT_Nr?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is either 8 or 16, and is equivalent to WFMPre:BYT_Nr * 8 and
DATa:WIDth * 8.
WFMPRE:BIT_NR might return 8, indicating that there are 8 bits per waveform
point.
WFMPre:BN_Fmt
Sets or queries the format of binary data for the waveform to be transferred.
Changing the value of WFMPre:BN_Fmt also changes the value of DATa:ENCdg.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:BN_Fmt { RI | RP }
WFMPre:BN_Fmt?
Arguments
RI specifies signed integer data-point representation.
RP specifies positive integer data-point representation.
Examples
WFMPRE:BN_FMT RP specifies that the binary waveform data are positive integer
data-points.
WFMPRE:BN_FMT? returns either RI or RP as the current waveform data format.
WFMPre:BYT_Nr
Sets or queries the data width for the waveform to be transferred. This command
is equivalent to DATa:WIDth. Changing WFMPre:BYT_Nr also changes
WFMPre:BIT_Nr and DATa:WIDth.
2-210
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
WFMPre:BYT_Nr?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is an integer in the range of 1 to 2 that sets the number of bytes per point.
WFMPRE:BYT_NR specifies that there are 2 bytes per waveform data point.
WFMPre:BYT_Or
Sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during
a waveform data transfer when DATa:WIDth or WFMPre:BYT_Nr is set to
2, or WFMPre:BIT_Nr is set to 16. Changing WFMPre:BYT_Or changes
DATa:ENCdg.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:BYT_Or { LSB | MSB }
WFMPre:BYT_Or?
Arguments
LSB selects the least significant byte to be transmitted first.
MSB selects the most significant byte to be transmitted first.
Examples
WFMPRE:BYT_OR MSB specifies that the most significant byte in the waveform
data is transferred first.
WFMPRE:BYT_OR? returns either MSB or LSB depending on which data byte
is transferred first.
WFMPre:ENCdg
Sets or queries the type of encoding for waveform data transferred with the
CURVe command. Changing WFMPre:ENCdg also changes DATa:ENCdg.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:ENCdg { ASC | BIN }
WFMPre:ENCdg?
Arguments
ASC specifies ASCII curve data.
BIN specifies binary curve data.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-211
Command Descriptions
Examples
WFMPRE:ENCDG ASC specifies that the waveform data is in ASCII format.
WFMPRE:ENCDG? might return BIN, indicating that the waveform data is in binary
format.
WFMPre:NR_Pt? (Query Only)
Returns the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform record, as
specified by DATa:SOUrce. The number of points depends on DATa:STARt,
DATa:STOP, and whether DATa:SOUrce is YT or FFT. NR_Pt is at most 2500 for
YT and 1024 for FFT. NR_Pt is always at least one.
When the DATa:SOUrce is not displayed, the TDS210 and TDS220 (firmware
below V 2.00) with a TDS2CMA communications module will return a value. All
other oscilloscope, firmware version, and module combinations will generate an
error and will return event code 2244.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:NR_Pt?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:ENCdg, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt
WFMPRE:NR_PT? might return 1024, which is the number of data points. If
DATa:WIDth is 2, then there are 2048 bytes in the curve.
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt? (Query Only)
NOTE. This query is not available when using a TDS210 or TDS220 oscilloscope
(firmware below V 2.00) with a TDS2CMA communications module.
Returns the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform record.
The number of points depends on DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, and whether
DATa:SOUrce is YT or FFT. NR_Pt is at most 2500 for YT and 1024 for FFT.
NR_Pt is always at least one.
When the DATa:SOUrce is not displayed, the oscilloscope will generate an error
and return event code 2244.
Group
2-212
Waveform
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Related Commands
Examples
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?
DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt
WFMPre:CH1:NR_Pt
Returns <NR1>, which is the number of data points. If DATa:WIDth is 2, then
there are <NR1>*2 bytes in the curve.
WFMPre:PT_Fmt
The set form of this command sets the format (Y or ENV) of the reference
waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command.
The query form returns the format of the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command, if that waveform is on or displayed. If the waveform is not displayed,
the query form of this command generates an error and returns event code 2244.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:PT_Fmt { ENV | Y }
WFMPre:PT_Fmt?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe
Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is
transmitted for each point in the waveform record.
For Y format, the time (absolute coordinate) of a point, relative to the trigger, can
be calculated using the following formula. N ranges from 0 to 2499.
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (n - PT_OFf)
For Y format, the magnitude (usually voltage, relative to ground) (absolute
coordinate) of a point can be calculated:
Yn = YZEro + YMUIty (yn - YOFf)
ENV specifies that the oscilloscope transmit the waveform as minimum and
maximum point pairs. Peak detect waveforms use ENV format. Peak Detect
mode specifies a maximum of 1250 (minimum, maximum) pairs, with the time
between pairs being 2*XINcr.
The magnitudes and times of ENV format waveform points can be calculated
using the same formulas used for Y format, if you recognize that the points
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-213
Command Descriptions
consist of (minimum, maximum) pairs, where each pair was collected over a
time period of 2*XINcr.
Thus, the samples for n=0 (a minimum) and n=1 (a maximum), the first
(minimum, maximum) pair, were collected over a time interval of width 2*XINcr,
that began at the time found by setting n to zero in the formula. The next pair
were collected over the interval that began at the time found by setting n to 2 in
the formula, and so on.
Examples
WFMPRE:PT_FMT Y sets the waveform data point format to Y.
WFMPRE:PT_FMT? returns either Y or ENV
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt
Same as WFMPre:PT_Fmt, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION. For set
commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope generates
error 2241.
WFMPre:PT_Off
The set form this command is ignored.
The query form always returns a 0, unless the DATA:SOUrce waveform is not
displayed, in which case the query generates an error and returns event code 2244.
This command is included for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.
NOTE. Use the WFMPre:XINcr, WFMPre:XUNit, and WFMPre:XZEro queries to
determine the trigger position.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:PT_Off
Arguments
Arguments are ignored.
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off
Same as WFMPre:PT_Off, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
2-214
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope
generates error 2241.
Otherwise, the set form of this command is ignored.
WFMPre:WFId? (Query Only)
Returns a descriptive string from the waveform specified in the DATa:SOUrce
command, if that waveform is active or displayed. If that waveform is not active
or displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with
event code 2244 (waveform requested is not active).
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:WFId?
Examples
For a YT waveform.
WFMPRE:WFID? might return: WFMPRE:WFID "Ch1, DC coupling,
1.0E0 V/div, 5.0E-4 s/div, 2500 points, Sample mode"
For a Math waveform, WFMPRE:WFID? might return: WFMPRE:WFID "Math,
DC coupling, 1.0E0 V/div, 5.0E-4 s/div, 2500 points, Sample
mode"
For an FFT spectrum: (TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B,
TDS2000, and TDS1000 Series and TDS200 Series with a TDS2MM measurement
module only).
WFMPRE:WFID? might return: WFMPRE:WFID "Math, DC coupling,
1.0E1 dB/div, 2.52525253E4 Hz/div, 1024 points, Sample mode"
For TBS1000B/EDU.
WFMPRE:WFID? might return: "FFT, DC coupling, 1.0E1 dB/div,
2.52525253E4 Hz/div, 1024 points, Sample mode"
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId?
Same as WFMPre:WFId, except that <wfm> specifies the source waveform
instead of DATa:SOUrce.
WFMPre:XINcr
The set form of this command specifies the interval (seconds per point for nonFFT,
Hertz per point for FFT) between samples of the reference waveform specified by
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-215
Command Descriptions
the DATa:DESTination command. The oscilloscope uses this value to calculate
the seconds/division or Hertz/division units shown in the status bar and cursor
readouts when displaying a reference waveform.
The query form returns the interval between samples of the waveform specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command, if that waveform is active or displayed. If
that waveform is inactive or not displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope
generates an execution error with event code 2244 (waveform requested is not
active).
NOTE. For waveform records acquired in Peak Detect mode, even though there is
a pair of samples for each conceptual time period, the XINcr is such that (XINcr *
recl) = the total time over which the data was collected.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:XINcr <NR3>
WFMPre:XINcr?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the interval between points in the waveform record, in the units specified
by WFMPre:XUNit. Note that at some fast sweeps, some points in the waveform
record are produced by interpolation.
DATa:SOUrce CH1; WFMPRE:XINCR? might return WFMPRE:XINCR 2.0E-6
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr
Same as WFMPre:XINcr, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope
generates error 2241.
WFMPre:XUNit
For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS200 Series with a
TDS2CMA communications module, the set form of this command specifies the
horizontal units ("s" for seconds and "Hz" for Hertz) for the reference waveform
specified by the DATa:DESTination command. Setting a reference waveform to
Hz causes the oscilloscope to display the waveform as an FFT waveform.
2-216
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
NOTE. For TDS200 oscilloscopes used with a TDS2CMA communications
module, the set form is ignored. Waveform commands:WFMPRE:XUNIT
WFMPRE:XUNIT
The query form returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by
DATa:SOURce. If the waveform specified by DATa:SOURce is not displayed, the
query generates event message 2244.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:XUNit <Qstring>
WFMPre:XUNit?
Arguments
<Qstring> is "s" or "Hz"
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit
Same as WFMPre:XUNit, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
WFMPre:XZEro
The set form of this command specifies the position, in XUNits, of the first
sample of the reference waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command,
relative to the trigger.
The query form returns the position of the first sample of the waveform specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command, if that waveform is active or displayed.
If that waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope
generates an execution error with event code 2244 (waveform requested is not
active).
The oscilloscope sets WFMPre:XZEro to zero when:
The display mode is set to XY.
The DATa:SOUrce is set to MATH FFT when the waveform is acquired.
NOTE. The oscilloscope uses XZEro when calculating cursor readouts.
Group
Waveform
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-217
Command Descriptions
Syntax
Arguments
WFMPre:XZEro <NR3>
WFMPre:XZEro?
<NR3> is the position, in XUNits, of the first waveform sample.
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro
Same as WFMPre:XZEro, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope
generates error 2241.
WFMPre:YMUlt
YMUlt is a value, expressed in YUNits per digitizer level, used to convert
waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula (where
dl is digitizer levels):
value_in_YUNits = ((curve_in_dl - YOFF_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZERO_in_YUNits
The set form of this command sets the vertical scale factor of the reference
waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command, expressed in YUNits
per digitizing level.
The query form returns a value for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command, if that waveform is active or displayed. If that waveform is not active
or displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope generates an execution error with
event code 2244 (waveform requested is not active).
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:YMUlt <NR3>
WFMPre:YMUlt?
Arguments
Returns
2-218
<NR3> is the vertical scale factor, in YUNits (usually volts) per sample value.
A query result of zero has special meaning. A zero indicates the waveform has
unknown vertical scaling. This is possible in the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000,
TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, TDS1000B, TDS2000, TDS1000, or
TDS200 Series. The TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series will never return zero.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
An example of unknown vertical scaling is a math waveform of CH1+CH2
where CH1 vertical scaling is different from CH2 vertical scaling. In this case,
WFMPre:YUNit? returns U. (Does not apply to the TPS2000B/TPS2000 Series.)
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt
Same as WFMPre:YMUlt, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope
generates error 2241.
WFMPre:YOFf
YOFf is a value, expressed in digitizer levels, used to convert waveform record
values to YUNit values using the following formula (where dl is digitizer levels):
value_in_YUNits = ((curve_in_dl - YOFF_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZERO_in_YUNits
The set form of this command stores a value for the reference waveform specified
by the DATa:DESTination command. This value does not affect how the
oscilloscope displays the waveform, but does affect the cursor readouts.
The query form returns a value for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command, in digitizer levels, if that waveform is active or displayed. If that
waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope generates
an execution error with event code 2244 (waveform requested is not active).
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:YOFf <NR3>
WFMPre:YOFf?
Arguments
<NR3> is a value expressed in digitizing levels.
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf
Same as WFMPre:YOFf, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope
generates error 2241.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-219
Command Descriptions
WFMPre:YUNit
For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS200 Series with a
TDS2CMA communications module or a TDS2MM measurement module, the set
form of this command sets the vertical units for the reference waveform specified
by DATa:DESTination.
NOTE. You can set a combination of WFMPre:XUNit and WFMPre:YUNit for a
reference waveform that is inconsistent (for example, seconds with dB or Hertz
with volts). The oscilloscope will not warn you of this condition. The oscilloscope
uses WFMPre:XUNit to determine whether the waveform is a YT or an FFT.
For TDS200 oscilloscopes used with a TDS2CMA communications or a TDS2MM
measurement module, the set form is ignored. Refer to the WFMPre:YMUlt
command for equivalent functionality.
The query form returns the vertical units of the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command, if that waveform is active or displayed. If that
waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails and the oscilloscope generates
an execution error with event code 2244 (waveform requested is not active).
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:YUNit <Qstring>
WFMPre:YUNit?
Arguments
<Qstring> is "Volts", "U", or "dB".
The TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series have the following additional
arguments:
"A" for amperes
"VA" for volt × amperes
"AA" for amperes × amperes
"VV" for volts × volts
2-220
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
Returns
The query returns the following:
Volts for volts
U for unknown units (divisions)
dB for decibels
? for unknown mask waveforms units
For the TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B,
TDS1000B, TPS2000B, and TPS2000 Series, the query can return the following
additional values:
A for amperes
VA for volt × amperes
AA for amperes × amperes
VV for volts × volts
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit
Same as WFMPre:YUNit, except that <wfm> specifies the source/destination
waveform instead of DATa:SOUrce and DATa:DESTINATION.
For set commands, if <wfm> is not a reference waveform, the oscilloscope
generates error 2241.
WFMPre:YZEro
For all model and firmware combinations except the TDS210 or TDS220
oscilloscope (firmware below V 2.00) with a TDS2CMA communications
module, YZEro is a value, expressed in YUNits, used to convert waveform record
values to YUNit values using the following formula (where dl is digitizer levels):
value_in_YUNits = ((curve_in_dl - YOFF_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZERO_in_YUNits
YZEro is used when calculating cursor readouts.
The set form of this command affects the reference waveform specified by
DATA:DESTination.
The query form of this command returns a value for the waveform specified by
DATA:SOUrce. If that waveform is not active or displayed, the query fails and
the oscilloscope generates an execution error with event code 2244 (waveform
requested is not active).
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-221
Command Descriptions
NOTE. For the TDS210 or TDS220 oscilloscope (firmware below V 2.00) with a
TDS2CMA communications module, the set form is ignored. The query always
returns zero.
Group
Waveform
Syntax
WFMPre:YZEro <NR3>
WFMPre:YZEro?
Arguments
<NR3> is a value, expressed in YUNits.
ZOOM? (Query Only)
Returns all zoom parameters.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOM?
ZOOM:FACtor
Sets or queries the zoom factor of a particular zoom box.
Conditions
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOM:FACtor { X1 | X2 | X5 | X10 }
ZOOM:FACtor?
Examples
2-222
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
ZOOM:FACtor X5 indicates that the specified zoom range is 20% of the acquired
waveform.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Command Descriptions
ZOOM:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal position of a particular zoom box.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOM:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
ZOOM:HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
NR3 is 1 to 100. It is the percent of the upper window that is to the left of the
screen center.
ZOOM:HORizontal:POSition 50.00 indicates that the zoom reference pointer
is current set at 50% of the acquired waveform.
ZOOM:HORizontal:SCAle? (Query Only)
Returns the zoom windows current time scale.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOM:HORizontal:SCAle?
ZOOM:MODE
Sets or queries the zoom mode as SCAle/POSition.
Conditions
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOM:MODE { SCALE | POSITION }
ZOOM:MODE?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
2-223
Command Descriptions
ZOOM:STATE
Sets or queries the zoom on/off state.
Conditions
2-224
TBS1000B/EDU models only.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOM:STATE { ON | OFF }
ZOOM:STATE?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
Status and Events
The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB,
RS-232, and USB interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant
events that occur within the oscilloscope.
The oscilloscope status reporting system consists of five 8-bit registers and two
queues. This section describes these registers and components, and explains how
the event handling system operates.
Registers
Overview
The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:
Status Registers contain information about the status of the oscilloscope.
They include the Standard Event Status Register (SESR).
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to
the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Service Request Enable Register (SRER).
Status Registers
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR)
record certain types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use.
IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an execution
error or message available. When an event of a given type occurs, the oscilloscope
sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one. (You can disable
bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See Enable Registers). Reading
the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred.
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR records eight types of
events that can occur within the oscilloscope. Use the *ESR? query to read the
SESR register. Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the
register can accumulate information about new events.
Figure 3-1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-1
Status and Events
Table 3-1: SESR bit functions
Bit
Function
7 (MSB)
PON
Power On. Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on.
On completion, the diagnostic self tests also set this bit.
6
URQ
User Request. Indicates that an application event has
occurred. *See note.
5
CME
4
EXE
Command Error. Shows that an error occurred while
the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query.
Execution Error. Shows that an error executing a
command or query.
3
DDE
Device Error. Shows that a device error occurred.
2
QYE
Query Error. Either an attempt was made to read the
1
RQC
Request Control. This is not used.
0 (LSB)
OPC
Operation Complete. Shows that the operation
Output Queue when no data was present or pending, or that
data in the Output Queue was lost.
is complete. This bit is set when all pending operations
complete following an *OPC command.
The Status Byte Register (SBR). Records whether output is available in the Output
Queue, whether the oscilloscope requests service, and whether the SESR has
recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in
the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial
Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.
Figure 3-2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)
Table 3-2: SBR bit functions
Bit
7 (MSB)
Function
———— Not used.
6
RQS
Request Service. Obtained from a serial poll. Shows
that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB
controller.
6
MSS
Master Status Summary. Obtained from *STB?
query. Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.
5
ESB
Event Status Bit. Shows that status is enabled and
present in the SESR.
3-2
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
Table 3-2: SBR bit functions (cont.)
Bit
Function
4
MAV
Message Available. Shows that output is available
in the Output Queue.
2
———— Not used.
———— Not used.
1–0
———— Not used.
3
Enable Registers
DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the
Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a
Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can
prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it
controls. In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register, the
corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable
Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and
the commands used to set them are described below.
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). This register controls which
types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue. The bits in the
DESER correspond to those in the SESR.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the
DESE? query to read the DESER.
Figure 3-3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)
The Event Status Enable Register (ESER). This register controls which types of
events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR. Use the *ESE
command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to read it.
Figure 3-4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)
The Service Request Enable Register (SRER). This register controls which bits
in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status
Summary (MSS) bit.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-3
Status and Events
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read the
register. The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is
read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero.
Figure 3-5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)
*PSC Command
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile
memory through a power cycle.
NOTE. To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send
*PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and
ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent
power-on cycles will generate a Service Request.
Queues
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
Output Queue
The oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this
queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an <EOM>.
The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command (or
query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.
CAUTION. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query,
the oscilloscope normally clears the first response and outputs the second while
reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A
fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of the first response as well. To
avoid this situation, the controller should always read the response immediately
after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before
sending the second query.
3-4
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
Event Queue
The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 20 events. If than 20
events stack up in the Event Queue, the 20th event is replaced by event code
350, "Queue Overflow."
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event
number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text
description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query (which returns all the event
numbers with a description of the event). Reading an event removes it from the
queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to
read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summarized
by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties
the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR?
reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are
put in the Event Queue but are not available until *ESR? is used again.
Event Handling Sequence
The following figure shows how to use the status and event handling system. In
the explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-5
Status and Events
Figure 3-6: Status and Event Handling Process
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event
is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the
appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event
Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the
ESB bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER
is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is
generated (7).
3-6
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
Synchronization Methods
Overview
Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received
by the oscilloscope, some commands start a process that requires time. For
example, once a single sequence acquisition command is executed, depending
upon the applied signals and trigger settings, it may take an extended period
of time before the acquisition is complete. Rather than remain idle while the
operation is in process, the oscilloscope will continue processing other commands.
This means that some operations will not be completed in the order that they
were sent.
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation.
A first operation must complete before the next one is processed. The oscilloscope
status and event reporting system is designed to accommodate this process.
The Operation Complete (OPC) bit of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
can be programmed to indicate when certain oscilloscope operations have
completed and, by setting the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) to report
OPC in the Event Status Bit (ESB) of the Status Byte Register (SBR) and setting
the Service Request Enable Register (SRER) to generate service request upon a
positive transition of the ESB, a service request (SRQ) interrupt can be generated
when certain operations complete as described in this section.
The following oscilloscope operations can generate an OPC:
Table 3-3: Oscilloscope operations that can generate OPC
Command
Conditions
ACQuire:STATE ON or ACQuire:STATE RUN
Only when ACQuire:STOPAfter is
set to SEQuence
*CAL?
CALibrate:CONTINUE
CALibrate:FACtory
CALIbrate:INTERNAL
FACtory
HARDCopy STARt
RECAll:SETUp <file as quoted string>
RECAll:WAVEform <file as quoted string>
*RST
SAVe:IMAGe <file as quoted string>
SAVe:SETUp <file as quoted string>
SAVe:WAVEform <file as quoted string>
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence
waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could
use the following command sequence to do this:
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-7
Status and Events
/** Set up conditional acquisition **/
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/** Acquire waveform data **/
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/** Set up the measurement parameters **/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT: IMMED:SOURCE CH 1
/** Take amplitude measurement **/
MEASUREMENT: MEAS1:VALUE?
The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not
finish before the oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement (see the following
figure). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.
Figure 3-7: Command processing without using synchronization
To be sure the oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before taking the
measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program.
Figure 3-8: Processing sequence with synchronization
You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with
your application program: *WAI, BUSY, *OPC, and *OPC?
Using the *WAI Command
The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate
an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI are processed before the OPC
message(s) are generated
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization
looks like this:
3-8
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement*/
*/
*WAI
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the
oscilloscope, but the commands will not be processed by the oscilloscope until
all in-process OPC operations are complete. If the input buffer becomes full,
the controller will be unable to write commands to the buffer. This can cause a
time-out.
Using the BUSY Query
The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is
busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as
single-sequence acquisition.
The same command sequence, using the BUSY? query for synchronization, looks
like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement */
While BUSY? keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI
command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-9
Status and Events
many commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up though, and
the repeated BUSY? query will result in bus traffic.
Using the *OPC Command
If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the
OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is
complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a
serial poll or service request handler.
Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register
will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization with
serial polling looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement.*/
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY.
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request
Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When the operation is
complete, the oscilloscope will generate a Service Request.
3-10
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization
looks like this
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 32
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC
The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices. The SRQ,
when it comes, interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
Using the *OPC? Query
The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates
an OPC message is complete. The *OPC? query does not return until all pending
OPC operations have completed. Therefore, your time-out must be set to a time at
least if the longest expected time for the operations to complete.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks
like this:
/* Set up single sequence acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC?
Wait for read from Output Queue.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-11
Status and Events
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However,
you must set the controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.
Messages
The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the programming
interface messages the oscilloscope generates in response to commands and
queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the oscilloscope gives detail about
the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This message is part of the
message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in the
SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each message
is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables, the associated SESR
bit is specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with the error message text.
No Event
The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status
to report. These have no associated SESR bit.
Table 3-4: No Event messages
Command Error
Code
Message
0
No events to report; queue empty
1
No events to report; new events pending *ESR?
The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper
syntax. Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules
in the section on command Syntax.
Table 3-5: Command error messages (CME bit 5)
3-12
Code
Message
100
Command error
101
Invalid character
102
Syntax error
103
Invalid separator
104
Data type error
105
GET not allowed
108
Parameter not allowed
109
Missing parameter
110
Command header error
112
Program mnemonic too long
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
Table 3-5: Command error messages (CME bit 5) (cont.)
Execution Error
Code
Message
113
Undefined header
120
Numeric data error
121
Invalid character in numeric
123
Exponent too large
124
Too many digits
130
Suffix error
131
Invalid suffix
134
Suffix too long
140
Character data error
141
Invalid character data
144
Character data too long
150
String data error
151
Invalid string data
152
String data too long
160
Block data error
161
Invalid block data
170
Command expression error
171
Invalid expression
The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of
a command.
Table 3-6: Execution error messages (EXE bit 4)
Code
Message
200
Execution error
221
Settings conflict
222
Data out of range
224
Illegal parameter value
241
Hardware missing
250
Mass storage error
251
Missing mass storage
252
Missing media
253
Corrupt media
254
Media full
255
Directory full
256
File name not found
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-13
Status and Events
Table 3-6: Execution error messages (EXE bit 4) (cont.)
3-14
Code
Message
257
File name error
258
Media protected
259
File name too long
270
Hardcopy error
271
Hardcopy device not responding
272
Hardcopy is busy
273
Hardcopy aborted
274
Hardcopy configuration error
280
Program error
282
Insufficient network printer information
283
Network printer not responding
284
Network printer server not responding
286
Program run time error
287
Print server not found
2200
Measurement error, Measurement system error
2201
Measurement error, Zero period
2202
Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2203
Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2204
Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2205
Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2206
Measurement error, Invalid gate
2207
Measurement error, Measurement overflow
2208
Measurement error, No backward Mid Ref crossing
2209
Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing
2210
Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform
2211
Measurement error, No backward Mid Ref crossing
2212
Measurement error, No negative crossing
2213
Measurement error, No positive crossing
2214
Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2215
Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform
2216
Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2217
Measurement error, Constant waveform
2219
Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm sample
2220
Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm cross
2221
Measurement error, No valid edge - No trigger cross
2222
Measurement error, No valid edge - No second cross
2223
Measurement error, Waveform mismatch
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
Table 3-6: Execution error messages (EXE bit 4) (cont.)
Code
Message
2224
Measurement error, WAIT calculating
2225
Measurement error, No waveform to measure
2226
Measurement error, Null Waveform
2227
Measurement error, Positive and Negative Clipping
2228
Measurement error, Positive Clipping
2229
Measurement error, Negative Clipping
2230
Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref
2231
Measurement error, No statistics available
2233
Requested waveform is temporarily unavailable
2235
Math error, invalid math description
2240
Invalid password
2241
Waveform requested is invalid
2244
Source waveform is not active
2245
Saveref error, selected channel is turned off
2250
Reference error, the reference waveform file is invalid
2253
Reference error, too many points received
2254
Reference error, too few points received
2259
File too big
2260
Calibration error
2270
Alias error
2271
Alias syntax error
2273
Illegal alias label
2276
Alias expansion error
2277
Alias redefinition not allowed
2278
Alias header not found
2285
TekSecure(R) Pass
2286
TekSecure(R) Fail
2301
Cursor error, Off screen
2302
Cursor error, Cursors are off
2303
Cursor error, Cursor source waveform is off
2500
Setup error, file does not look like a setup file
2501
Setup warning, could not recall all values from external setup
2620
Mask error, too few points received
2760
Mark limit reached
2761
No mark present
2762
Search copy failed
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-15
Status and Events
Device Error
The following table lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope
operation. These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair.
Table 3-7: Device error messages (DDE bit 3)
System Event
Code
Message
310
System error
311
Memory error
312
PUD memory lost
314
Save/recall memory lost
The following table lists the system event messages. These messages are
generated whenever certain system conditions occur.
Table 3-8: System event messages
Execution Warning
Code
Message
400
Query event
401
Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402
Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403
User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404
Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405
Request control
410
Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420
Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430
Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
468
Knob/Keypad value changed
472
Application variable changed
The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of
command execution. They also notify you of a possible unexpected results.
Table 3-9: Execution warning messages (EXE bit 4)
3-16
Code
Message
528
Parameter out of range
532
Curve data too long, Curve truncated
533
Curve error, Preamble values are inconsistent
540
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Status and Events
Table 3-9: Execution warning messages (EXE bit 4) (cont.)
Code
Message
543
Measurement warning, Low resolution
544
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545
Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
546
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
Table 3-10: Execution warning messages (EXE bit 4)
Code
Internal Warning
Message
540
Measurement warning
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543
Measurement warning, Low resolution
544
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545
Measurement warning, Invalid min max
546
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the
oscilloscope.
Table 3-11: Internal warning messages
Code
Message
600
Internal warning
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
3-17
Status and Events
3-18
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Programming Examples
Programming Examples
The following series of commands and queries illustrate many of the most
common commands and techniques.
To use these commands and queries over USB, you must use a program or
routines that interface to the USBTMC driver on your PC. You can also use the
PC Communications software that came on the CD with your oscilloscope to get
the same data without having to write programs. For operating information, you
can launch the PC Communications software and refer to the online help.
To use these commands and queries over GPIB, you must use a program or
routines that interface to the GPIB hardware in your computer. The software is
usually supplied by the GPIB hardware manufacturer.
To use these commands and queries over RS-232, you must use a communications
program on your computer, such as tip in the Unix environment, or Hyperterminal
in the Microsoft Windows environment.
In these examples, data sent from the controller computer to the oscilloscope is
prefaced with the > symbol. Replies from the oscilloscope have no preface.
> REM "Check for any messages, and clear them from the queue."
> *ESR?
128
> ALLEV ?
:ALLEV 401,"Power on; "
> REM "Set the oscilloscope to the default state."
> FACTORY
> REM "Set the oscilloscope parameters that differ from the defaults."
> CH1:VOLTS 2.0
> HOR:MAIN:SCALE 100e-6
> TRIG:MAIN:LEVEL 2.4
> REM "Start a single sequence acquisition."
> ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
> ACQUIRE:STATE ON
> REM "Wait for the acquisition to complete."
> REM "Note: your controller program time-out must be set long enough to
handle the wait."
> *OPC?
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
4-1
Programming Examples
1
> REM "Use the oscilloscope built-in measurements to measure the waveform
you acquired."
> MEASU:IMMED:TYPE MEAN
> MEASU:IMMED:VALUE?
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE 2.4631931782E0
> REM "Be sure to use the *esr? query to check for measurement errors."
> MEASU:IMMED:TYPE FREQ
> MEASU:IMMED:VALUE?
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE 9.9E37
> *ESR?
16
> ALLEV?
:ALLEV 2202,"Measurement error, No period found; "
> REM "Query out the waveform points, for later analysis on your controller
computer." > data:encdg ascii
> CURVE?
:CURVE 7,6,5,5,5,6,6,6,8 [...]
> REM "Query out the parameters used for calculating the times and voltages of
the waveform points."
> WFMPRE?
:WFMPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG ASC;BN_FMT RP;BYT_OR
MSB;NR_PT 2500; [...]
4-2
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Appendices
Appendix A: ASCII Code Chart
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
A-1
Appendix A: ASCII Code Chart
A-2
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Appendix B: Factory Setup
The following listing is the instrument response to the concatenated command
FACtory;SET. This response describes the factory default setup in detail.
(Carriage returns have been inserted for clarity.)
Items enclosed in ( ) parentheses are returned by the SET? query response, but are
not changed by the FACtory command.
TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, and TDS1000B Series
Oscilloscopes
This is a typical response for 2 channel models with a monochrome display.
:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;
:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;START
1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;
:LOCK NONE;
:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;CONTRAST
50;INVERT OFF;
:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;
:CH1:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION
0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT "V";
:CH2:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION
0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT "V";
:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;HOLDOFF:VALUE
5.0E-7;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY
NORMAL;LINE 1;STANDARD NTSC;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY
POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E-3;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;MATH 0;REFA
0;REFB 0;
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;POSITION2
2.0E-3;
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
B-1
Appendix B: Factory Setup
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.2E0;POSITION2 -3.2E0;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE1 CH1;
:MATH:DEFINE "CH1 - CH2";VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 2.0E0;
:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;
:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;
:HARDCOPY:BUTTON PRINTS;FORMAT JPEG;PORT USB;LAYOUT
PORTRAIT;INKSAVER ON;
:PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE DEFLT;IMAGESIZE DEFLT;PAPERTYPE
DEFLT;PRINTQUAL DEFLT;DATEPRINT DEFLT;IDPRINT DEFLT;
:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;
:AUTORANGE:SETTINGS BOTH;
:SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT JPEG
TPS2000 Series Oscilloscopes
Items enclosed in < > brackets are present only when the TPS2PWR1 Power
Application Module software key is installed.
This is a typical response for 2 channel models.
:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;
:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;START
1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;
:LOCK NONE;
:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;BRIGHTNESS
30;CONTRAST 50;INVERT OFF;
:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;
:CH1:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION
0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT "V";
:CH2:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION
0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT "V";
B-2
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Appendix B: Factory Setup
:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY
NORMAL;LINE 1;STANDARD NTSC;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY
POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E- 3;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;MATH 0;REFA
0;REFB 0;
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;POSITION2
2.0E-3;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.2E0;POSITION2 -3.2E0;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE1 CH1;<SOURCE2
CH2;>
:MATH:DEFINE "CH1 - CH2";VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 2.0E0;
:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;
:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;
:HARDCOPY:BUTTON PRINTS;FORMAT EPSON;PORT
CENTRONICS;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;INKSAVER ON;
:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;
:AUTORANGE:SETTINGS BOTH;
:SAVE:IMAGE:FILE FORMAT BMP;
<:POWERANALYSIS:SOURCES CH1CH2;>
<:WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOURCE CH1;>
<:HARMONICS:ENABLE OFF;SETUP AUTOMATIC;SHOW ALL;SELECT
1;SOURCE CH1;>
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
B-3
Appendix B: Factory Setup
<:SWLOSS:ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS;ENABLE OFF;SOURCES
CH1CH2;STOPAFTER 50;TONSTART 90;TONEND 10;TOFFSTART
10;TOFFEND 10;VSAT 1.0E0;UNITS WATTS>
TPS2000B Series Oscilloscopes
Items enclosed in < > brackets are present only when the TPS2PWR1 Power
Application Module software key is installed.
This is a typical response for 2 channel models.
:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;
:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;START
1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;
:LOCK NONE;
:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;BRIGHTNESS
30;CONTRAST 50;INVERT OFF;
:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;
:CH1:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION
0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT "V";
:CH2:PROBE 1.0E1;CURRENTPROBE 1.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION
0.0E0;COUPLING DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;YUNIT "V";
:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY
NORMAL;LINE 1;STANDARD NTSC;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY
POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E- 3;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;MATH 0;REFA
0;REFB 0;
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;POSITION2
2.0E-3;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.2E0;POSITION2 -3.2E0;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
B-4
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Appendix B: Factory Setup
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE1 CH1;<SOURCE2
CH2;>
:MATH:DEFINE "CH1 - CH2";VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 2.0E0;
:MATH:FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;
:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;
:HARDCOPY:BUTTON PRINTS;FORMAT EPSON;PORT
CENTRONICS;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;INKSAVER ON;
:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;
:AUTORANGE:SETTINGS BOTH;
:SAVE:IMAGE:FILE FORMAT BMP;
<:POWERANALYSIS:SOURCES CH1CH2;>
<:WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOURCE CH1;>
<:HARMONICS:ENABLE OFF;SETUP AUTOMATIC;SHOW ALL;SELECT
1;SOURCE CH1;>
<:SWLOSS:ACQUIRE CONTINUOUS;ENABLE OFF;SOURCES
CH1CH2;STOPAFTER 50;TONSTART 90;TONEND 10;TOFFSTART
10;TOFFEND 10;VSAT 1.0E0;UNITS WATTS>
TDS1000 and TDS2000 Series Oscilloscopes
Items enclosed in < > angle brackets are present only when the TDS2MEM
module is installed.
Responses for channel 3 and 4 apply only to 4-channel models.
:HEADER 1;(:VERBOSE 1;)
:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1;START
1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;
(:LOCK NONE;)
:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0;(CONTRAST
50);(INVERT OFF);
:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
B-5
Appendix B: Factory Setup
:CH1:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:CH2:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:CH3:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:CH4:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY
NORMAL;LINE 1;STANDARD NTSC;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH1;WIDTH:POLARITY
POSITIVE;WHEN EQUAL;WIDTH 1.0E-3;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;
:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH 0;REFA 0;REFB 0;REFC 0;REFD
0;
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3;POSITION2
2.0E-3;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 -3.2E0;POSITION2 3.2E0;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE CH1;
:MATH:DEFINE "CH1 - CH2";FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE
1.0E0;
:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;
(:HARDCOPY:<BUTTON PRINTS;>FORMAT EPSON;PORT
CENTRONICS;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;INKSAVER ON;)
B-6
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Appendix B: Factory Setup
(<SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT BMP;>)
(:LANGUAGE ENGLISH)
TDS210 and TDS220 Oscilloscopes
Items enclosed in < > brackets are present only when the TDS2MM module is
installed.
:HEADER 1;(:VERBOSE 1;)
:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1; START
1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;
(:LOCK NONE;)
:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0; CONTRAST
50;
:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1; STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;
:CH1:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0; COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;<INVERT OFF;>
:CH2:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0; COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;<INVERT OFF;>
:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN; MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5;POSITION 0.0E0;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE; HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY NORMAL;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;
:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;MATH 0;REFA 0;REFB 0;
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS; POSITION1 -2.0E-3; POSITION2
2.0E-3;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 -3.2E0; POSITION2 3.2E0;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE CH1;
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
B-7
Appendix B: Factory Setup
:MATH:DEFINE "CH1 + CH2";
<FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;>
<:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;>
(:HARDCOPY:FORMAT EPSON;PORT CENTRONICS; LAYOUT
PORTRAIT;)
(:LANGUAGE ENGLISH)
TDS224 Oscilloscopes
Items enclosed in < > brackets are present only when the TDS2MM module is
installed.
:HEADER 1;(:VERBOSE 1;)
:DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;DESTINATION REFA;SOURCE CH1; START
1;STOP 2500;WIDTH 1;
(:LOCK NONE;)
:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;PERSISTENCE 0; CONTRAST
50;
:ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;STATE 1;STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;
:CH1:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:CH2:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:CH3:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:CH4:PROBE 10;SCALE 1.0E0;POSITION 0.0E0;COUPLING
DC;BANDWIDTH OFF;INVERT OFF;
:HORIZONTAL:VIEW MAIN;MAIN:SCALE 5.0E-4;POSITION 0.0E0;
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 5.0E-5; POSITION 0.0E0;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE; HOLDOFF:VALUE 5.0E-7;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1;SYNC LINE;POLARITY NORMAL;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.0E0;
:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH 0;REFA 0; REFB 0;REFC
0;REFD 0;
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;SELECT:SOURCE CH1;
B-8
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Appendix B: Factory Setup
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 -2.0E-3; POSITION2
2.0E-3;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 -3.2E0;POSITION2 3.2E0;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE NONE;SOURCE CH1;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;SOURCE CH1;
:MATH:DEFINE "CH1 - CH2";
<FFT:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0E1;SCALE 1.0E0;>
<:MATH:FFT:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E0;SCALE 1.0E0;>
(:HARDCOPY:FORMAT EPSON;PORT CENTRONICS; LAYOUT
PORTRAIT;)
(:LANGUAGE ENGLISH)
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
B-9
Appendix B: Factory Setup
B-10
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Appendix C: Reserved Words
*CAL
*CLS
*DDT
*ESE
*ESR
*IDN
*LRN
*OPC
*PSC
*RCL
*RST
*SAV
*SRE
*STB
*TRG
*TST
*WAI
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
ABOrt
AC
ACLINE
ACQuire
ALL
ALLEv
ASC
ASCIi
AUTO
AUTOMATIC
AUTORange
AUTOSet
AVErage
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BANdwidth
BATTERIES
BAUd
BIN
BIT_Nr
BMP
BN_Fmt
BOTH
BRIGHTness
BUBBLEJet
BUSY
BUTTON
BUTTONLIGHT
BYT_Nr
BYT_Or
Block
CALibrate
CARD
CENtronics
CH1
CH1CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3CH4
CH4
CM10BY15
CM13BY18
CM15BY21
CM18BY24
CM6BY8
CM7BY10
CM9BY13
COMpare
CONDUCTION
CONTINUE
CONTINUOUS
CONTRast
COUPling
CR
CRLf
CRMs
CURRENTPRObe
CURSor
CURSORRms
CURVe
CWD
DATALOGging
DATE
DATEPRINT
DATa
DC
DCLIne
DEF
DEFINE
DEFLT
DEFault
DELay
DELEte
DELTa
DELay
DESE
DESKJet
DESTination
DIAg
DIR
DISplay
DOTs
DPU3445
DPU411
DPU412
DRAFT
DURAtion
E
EDGE
ENAble
ENCdg
ENGLish
ENV
EPSC60
EPSC80
EPSIMAGE
EPSOn
EQual
ERRLOG
EVEN
EVENT
EVMsg
EVQty
EXECute
EXT
EXT10
EXT5
FACtory
FALL
FALLINGedge
FASTPHOTO
FFT
FIELD
FILEFormat
FILESystem
FINE
FIRST
FLAg
FORCe
FORMat
FREESpace
FRENch
FREQuency
FREquency
FUNCtion
GASgauge
GERMan
GND
GPIb
HAGAKIPC
HAGAKIPCARD
HARDCopy
HARDFlagging
HARmonics
HBArs
HDELTa
HDR
HEADer
HERtz
HFRej
HOLDOff
HORizontal
HRMS
ID
IDPRINT
IMAGESIZE
IMAge
IMMed
IN11BY17
IN2P5BY3P25
IN4BY6
IN8BY10
INDEX
INF
INIT
INKSaver
INTERLEAF
INTERNAL
INVERT
INVert
INside
ITALian
JAPAnese
JOULES
JPEG
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
C-1
Appendix C: Reserved Words
JPG
KOREan
L
L2
L4
LANGuage
LANdscape
LASERJet
LAYout
LETTER
LEVELS
LEVel
LF
LFCr
LFRej
LIMit
LINE
LINENum
LOCk
LOG
LSB
MAIn
MANUAL
MATH
MAXImum
MEAN
MEASUrement
MINImum
MKDir
MM100BY150
MM54BY86
MODe
MSB
MULTICYcle
N
NEGAtive
NEXT
NOISErej
NONE
NONe
NORMal
NOTEqual
NRMAL
NR_Pt
NTSc
NUMACq
NUMAVg
NWIdth
ODD
OFF
ON
OUTside
C-2
PAL
PAPERSIZE
PAPERTYPE
PARity
PCX
PEAKdetect
PERCent
PERIod
PERSistence
PFPHASE
PHAse
PHOTO
PICTBridge
PK2pk
PLAIN
POLarity
PORT
PORTRait
PORTUguese
POSITIVe
POSition
POWERFACTOR
POWer
POWerANALYSIS
PRESENt
PRINTQUAL
PRINTS
PRObe
PT_Fmt
PT_Off
PULse
PWIdth
RECAll
RECOrdlength
REFx
REM
REName
RESUlt
RI
RIBinary
RISINGedge
RISe
RLE
RMDir
RMS
ROLL100MM
ROLL127MM
ROLL210MM
ROLL89MM
RP
RPBinary
RS232
RUN
RUNSTop
SAMple
SAVESAll
SAVESImage
SAVE
SAVEIMAge
SAVEWFM
SCAle
SECOnds
SECdiv
SELect
SEQuence
SET
SETLevel
SETTings
SETUp
SHOW
SIGNAL
SIMPlifiedchinese
SINGLECYcle
SLOpe
SOFTFlagging
SOURCE
SOURCE1
SOURCE2
SOUrce
SOUrces
SPANish
SRIbinary
SRPbinary
STANDard
STARt
STATE
STATUS
STOP
STOPAfter
STYle
SWLoss
SYNC
TARget
TEMPLate
TERMinator
THDF
THDR
THINKjet
TIFF
TIME
TIMe
TOFFEND
TOFFSTART
TOLerance
TONEND
TONSTART
TOTAL
TRADitionalchinese
TRANsmit
TRIGger
TRUEPOWER
TURNOFF
TURNON
TYPe
UNIts
UNLock
USB
VALue
VAR
VBArs
VDELTa
VECtors
VERBose
VERtical
VIDeo
VIEW
VIOLation
VOLts
VSAT
WATTS
WAVEform
WAVEFORMANALYSIS
WAVEform
WAVFrm
WFCREST
WFCYCRMS
WFFREQ
WFId
WFMPre
WHEN
WIDth
WINDOW
XINcr
XUNit
XY
XZEro
Y
YMUlt
YOFf
YT
YUNit
YZEro
ZONE
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Glossary
Glossary
ASCII
Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Controllers transmit commands to the digitizing oscilloscope using ASCII
character encoding.
Address
A 7-bit code that identifies an instrument on the communication bus. The
digitizing oscilloscope must have a unique address for the controller to recognize
and transmit commands to it.
Backus-Naur Form (BNF)
A standard notation system for command syntax. The syntax in this manual use
BNF notation.
Controller
A computer or other device that sends commands to and accepts responses from
the digitizing oscilloscope.
EOI
A mnemonic referring to the control line "End or Identify" on the GPIB interface
bus. One of the two possible end-of-message terminators.
EOM
A generic acronym referring to the end-of-message terminator. For GPIB, the
end-of-message terminator is either an EOI or the ASCII code for line feed (LF).
For RS-232, the end-of-message terminator is the ASCII code for line feed (LF).
For USB, the end-of-message terminator is the EOM bit in a USBTMC message.
GPIB Address
When communicating with a TBS1000B/EDU, TBS1000, TDS2000C,
TDS1000C-EDU, TDS2000B, or TDS1000B Series oscilloscope using a
TEK-USB-488 adapter, you can set a unique GPIB address for the oscilloscope in
the UTILITY" Options " GPIB Setup option.
IEEE
Acronym for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
RS-232
A serial, full-duplex, asynchronous communication port that follows
ANSI/EIA/TIA-562-1989[1], ANSI/EIA/TIA-574-1990[2], and CCITT
V.24-1989[3] standards.
Serial Poll
A device (such as an oscilloscope) on the GPIB bus can request service from the
GPIB Controller by asserting the GPIB SRQ line (a Hardware line that is only
present on the GPIB communications bus). A device on the USB bus can request
service from the host by sending an SRQ packet on the Interrupt-IN endpoint.
When a controller or a USB host acknowledges the SRQ, it "serial polls" each
open device on the bus to determine which device on the bus requested service.
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Glossary-1
Glossary
Any device requesting service returns a status byte with bit 6 set and then
unasserts the SRQ line (GPIB only). Devices not requiring service return a status
byte with bit 6 cleared.
USB
An acronym for Universal Serial Bus.
USBTMC
An acronym for USB Test and Measurement Class.
USB488
The USBTMC subclass specification that implements an IEEE488-like interface
over USB.
Glossary-2
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Index
Symbols and Numbers
, 2-74
A
ACQuire?, 2-39
ACQuire:MODe, 2-40
ACQuire:NUMACq?, 2-41
ACQuire:NUMAVg, 2-41
ACQuire:STATE, 2-42
ACQuire:STOPAfter, 2-43
Acquisition commands, 2-11
ALLEv?, 2-43
Arguments, 2-7
ASCII, 2-1
code chart, A-1
AUTORange, 2-44
AUTORange:SETTings, 2-45
AUTORange:STATE, 2-44
AUTOSet, 2-45
AUTOSet:ENABLE, 2-46
AUTOSet:SIGNAL?, 2-46
AUTOSet:VIEW, 2-47
B
BNF (Backus Naur form), 2-1
BUSY?, 2-48
C
*CAL?, 2-48
CALibrate:ABOrt, 2-49
CALibrate:CONTINUE, 2-49
CALibrate:FACtory, 2-50
CALibrate:INTERNAL, 2-50
CALibrate:STATUS?, 2-51
Calibration and Diagnostic commands, 2-11
CH<x>?, 2-51
CH<x>:BANdwidth, 2-52
CH<x>:COUPling, 2-53
CH<x>:CURRENTPRObe, 2-53
CH<x>:INVert, 2-54
CH<x>:POSition, 2-55
CH<x>:PRObe, 2-56
CH<x>:SCAle, 2-56
CH<x>:VOLts, 2-57
CH<x>:YUNit, 2-57
*CLS, 2-58
Command and Query Structure, 2-2
Command Groups, 2-11
Command syntax,
BNF (Backus Naur form), 2-1
Command,
syntax, 2-1
syntax:BNF (Backus Naur form), 2-1
communications modules,
references to, vii
Conventions, vii
COUNTERFreq?, 2-58
COUNTERFreq:CH1Level, 2-59
COUNTERFreq:CH1State, 2-59
COUNTERFreq:CH1Value?, 2-59
COUNTERFreq:CH2Level, 2-59
COUNTERFreq:CH2State, 2-60
COUNTERFreq:CH2Value?, 2-60
Cursor commands, 2-12
CURSor?, 2-60
CURSor:FUNCtion, 2-61
CURSor:HBArs?, 2-61
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?, 2-62
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-62
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?, 2-63
CURSor:SELect:SOUrce, 2-64
CURSor:VBArs?, 2-64
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, 2-64
CURSor:VBArs:HDELTa?, 2-65
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?, 2-65
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-66
CURSor:VBArs:SLOPE?, 2-67
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts, 2-67
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?, 2-68
CURVe, 2-68
D
DATa, 2-69
DATa:DESTination, 2-70
DATa:ENCdg, 2-70
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Index-1
Index
DATa:SOUrce, 2-72
DATa:STARt, 2-72
DATa:STOP, 2-73
DATa:TARget, 2-73
DATa:WIDth, 2-74
DATALOGging?, 2-74
DATALOGging:DURAtion, 2-74
DATALOGging:SOURCE, 2-75
DATALOGging:STATE, 2-76
DATE, 2-76
*DDT, 2-77
DESE, 2-77
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?, 2-78
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?, 2-79
Display commands, 2-13
DISplay?, 2-79
DISplay:BACKLight, 2-79
DISplay:BRIGHTness, 2-80
DISplay:CONTRast, 2-80
DISplay:FORMat, 2-81
DISplay:INVert, 2-81
DISplay:PERSistence, 2-82
DISplay:STYle, 2-82
Documentation, iv
E
ERRLOG:FIRST?, 2-83
ERRLOG:NEXT?, 2-83
*ESE, 2-84
*ESR?, 2-84
Event handling, 3-1
EVENT?, 2-85
EVMsg?, 2-85
EVQty?, 2-86
Example programming, 4-1
Examples,
Programming, 4-1
F
Factory setup,
detailed description, B-1
FACtory, 2-86
FFT?, 2-94
FFT:HORizontal:POSition, 2-94
FFT:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-94
FFT:SOURce, 2-95
Index-2
FFT:SRCWFM, 2-95
FFT:VERtical:POSition, 2-95
FFT:VERtical:SCAle, 2-95
FFT:WIN, 2-96
File system commands, 2-15
FILESystem?, 2-88
FILESystem:CWD, 2-88
FILESystem:DELEte, 2-89
FILESystem:DIR?, 2-90
FILESystem:FORMat, 2-90
FILESystem:FREESpace?, 2-91
FILESystem:MKDir, 2-91
FILESystem:REName, 2-92
FILESystem:RMDir, 2-93
H
Hard copy commands, 2-17
HARDCopy, 2-96
HARDCopy:BUTTON, 2-97
HARDCopy:FORMat, 2-98
HARDCopy:INKSaver, 2-100
HARDCopy:LAYout, 2-100
HARDCopy:PORT, 2-101
HARmonics?, 2-102
HARmonics:ENABle, 2-102
HARmonics:FREquency?, 2-103
HARmonics:HRMS?, 2-103
HARmonics:PERCent?, 2-104
HARmonics:PHAse?, 2-104
HARmonics:RMS?, 2-104
HARmonics:SAVe, 2-104
HARmonics:SELect, 2-105
HARmonics:SETUp, 2-106
HARmonics:SHOW, 2-106
HARmonics:SOUrce, 2-107
HARmonics:THDF?, 2-107
HARmonics:THDR?, 2-108
HDR, 2-108
HEADer, 2-108
Horizontal commands, 2-17
HORizontal?, 2-109
HORizontal:DELay?, 2-109
HORizontal:DELay:POSition, 2-110
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle, 2-110
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv, 2-111
HORizontal:MAIn?, 2-111
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition, 2-112
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Index
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle, 2-112
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, 2-113
HORizontal:POSition, 2-113
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?, 2-113
HORizontal:SCAle, 2-114
HORizontal:SECdiv, 2-114
HORizontal:VIEW, 2-114
I
ID?, 2-115
*IDN?, 2-116
IEEE Std. 488.2-1987, 2-1
L
LANGuage, 2-117
LIMit?, 2-118
LIMit:COMpare, 2-118
LIMit:RESUlt:FAIL?, 2-119
LIMit:RESUlt:PASS?, 2-119
LIMit:RESUlt:TOTAL?, 2-120
LIMit:SAVEIMAge, 2-120
LIMit:SAVEWFM, 2-121
LIMit:SOUrce, 2-121
LIMit:STATE, 2-122
LIMit:STOPAfter:MODe, 2-122
LIMit:STOPAfter:TIMe, 2-123
LIMit:STOPAfter:VIOLation, 2-124
LIMit:STOPAfter:WAVEform, 2-124
LIMit:TEMPLate, 2-125
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, 2-125
LIMit:TEMPlate:DUALSOUrce, 2-126
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVEFIRSource, 2-126
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESECSource, 2-127
LIMit:TEMPLate:SAVESOUrce, 2-127
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, 2-127
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal, 2-128
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical, 2-129
LOCk, 2-129
*LRN?, 2-130
M
Manual Conventions, 2-39
Manuals, iv
Math commands, 2-20
MATH?, 2-130
MATH:DEFINE, 2-130
MATH:FFT?, 2-132
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:POSition, 2-132
MATH:FFT:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-133
MATH:FFT:VERtical:POSition, 2-134
MATH:FFT:VERtical:SCAle, 2-134
MATH:VERtical?, 2-135
MATH:VERtical:POSition, 2-135
MATH:VERtical:SCAle, 2-136
Measurement commands, 2-22
MEASUrement?, 2-136
MEASUrement:CLEARSNAPSHOT, 2-137
MEASUrement:GATing, 2-137
MEASUrement:IMMed?, 2-137
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce[1], 2-138
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2, 2-138
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, 2-139
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?, 2-143
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?, 2-143
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?, 2-144
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce, 2-145
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe, 2-145
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, 2-149
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?, 2-149
MEASUrement:SNAPSHOT, 2-150
MEASUrement:SNAPSOUrce, 2-151
Message,
handling, 3-1
Miscellaneous commands, 2-23
Mnemonics, 2-6
O
*OPC, 2-151
P
PictBridge commands, 2-24
PICTBridge:DATEPRINT, 2-152
PICTBridge:DEF, 2-152
PICTBridge:IDPRINT, 2-153
PICTBridge:IMAGESIZE, 2-153
PICTBridge:PAPERSIZE, 2-154
PICTBridge:PAPERTYPE, 2-155
PICTBridge:PRINTQUAL, 2-155
Power and Battery-Related commands, 2-25
Power Measurement commands, 2-25
POWer?, 2-156
POWer:AC:PRESENt?, 2-156
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Index-3
Index
POWer:BATTERIES:TIME?, 2-157
POWer:BATTERY<x>:GASgauge?, 2-156
POWer:BATTERY<x>:STATUS?, 2-157
POWer:BUTTONLIGHT, 2-158
POWerANALYSIS:SOUrces, 2-158
Programming examples, 4-1
Programming,
examples, 4-1
*PSC, 2-159
R
*RCL, 2-160
RECAll:SETUp, 2-160
RECAll:WAVEForm, 2-161
REM, 2-162
RS-232 commands, 2-28
RS232?, 2-162
RS232:BAUd, 2-162
RS232:HARDFlagging, 2-163
RS232:PARity, 2-164
RS232:SOFTFlagging, 2-164
RS232:TRANsmit:TERMinator, 2-165
*RST, 2-166
S
*SAV, 2-167
Save and Recall commands, 2-28
SAVe:IMAge, 2-167
SAVe:IMAge:FILEFormat, 2-168
SAVe:SETUp, 2-169
SAVe:WAVEform, 2-170
SELect?, 2-171
SELect:<wfm>, 2-171
SELect:FFT, 2-172
SET?, 2-172
Setups,
factory: TBS1000, TDS2000C, TDS1000C-EDU,
TDS2000B and TDS1000B, B-1
factory:TDS1000, B-5
factory:TDS1000B, B-1
factory:TDS2000, B-5
factory:TDS210, B-7
factory:TDS220, B-7
factory:TDS224, B-8
factory:TPS2000, B-2, B-4
*SRE, 2-173
Index-4
Status and error commands, 2-29
Status, 3-1
*STB?, 2-173
SWLoss?, 2-174
SWLoss:ACQuire, 2-174
SWLoss:AVErage:CONDUCTION?, 2-175
SWLoss:AVErage:N?, 2-175
SWLoss:AVErage:TOTAL?, 2-176
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNOFF?, 2-176
SWLoss:AVErage:TURNON?, 2-177
SWLoss:ENABLe, 2-178
SWLoss:LEVELS, 2-178
SWLoss:LOG:CONDUCTION?, 2-179
SWLoss:LOG:INDEX, 2-179
SWLoss:LOG:TOTAL?, 2-180
SWLoss:LOG:TURNOFF?, 2-180
SWLoss:LOG:TURNON?, 2-181
SWLoss:SAVE, 2-181
SWLoss:SOURCES, 2-182
SWLoss:STOPAfter, 2-183
SWLoss:TOFFEND, 2-183
SWLoss:TOFFSTART, 2-184
SWLoss:TONEND, 2-184
SWLoss:TONSTART, 2-185
SWLoss:UNITs, 2-185
SWLoss:VALue:CONDUCTION?, 2-186
SWLoss:VALue:TOTAL?, 2-186
SWLoss:VALue:TURNOFF?, 2-187
SWLoss:VALue:TURNON?, 2-187
SWLoss:VSAT, 2-188
Syntax,
BNF (Backus Naur form), 2-1
command, 2-1
T
TDS2CM communications module,
see TDS2CMA, vii
TDS2CMA communications module,
where to find installation information, 1-1
TDS2MM measurement module,
where to find installation information, 1-1
TIMe, 2-188
TRENDPLOT?, 2-189
TRENDPLOT:STATE, 2-189
TRENDPLOT:TIME, 2-189
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:AVG?, 2-190
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MAX?, 2-190
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Index
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:MIN?, 2-190
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALE?, 2-191
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMAX?, 2-191
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SCALEMIN?, 2-191
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:SOURCE, 2-191
TRENDPLOT:TP<x>:TYPe, 2-192
*TRG, 2-192
Trigger commands, 2-30
TRIGger, 2-192
TRIGger:MAIn, 2-193
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?, 2-193
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling, 2-194
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-194
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-195
TRIGger:MAIn:FREQuency?, 2-195
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?, 2-196
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue, 2-196
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel, 2-197
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe, 2-197
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?, 2-198
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce, 2-198
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?, 2-199
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity, 2-199
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEN, 2-199
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WIDth, 2-200
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe, 2-201
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?, 2-201
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE, 2-201
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:POLarity, 2-202
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce, 2-202
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANDard, 2-203
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNC, 2-204
TRIGger:STATE?, 2-204
*TST?, 2-205
U
UNLock, 2-205
Vertical commands, 2-32
W
*WAI, 2-206
Waveform commands, 2-32
WAVEFORMANALYSIS:SOUrce, 2-207
WAVFrm?, 2-207
WFMPre,
Additional Commands for Compatibility, 2-208
WFMPre?, 2-208
WFMPre:<wfm>?, 2-209
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?, 2-212
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro, 2-209
WFMPre:BIT_Nr, 2-209
WFMPre:BN_Fmt, 2-210
WFMPre:BYT_Nr, 2-210
WFMPre:BYT_Or, 2-211
WFMPre:ENCdg, 2-211
WFMPre:NR_Pt?, 2-212
WFMPre:PT_Fmt, 2-213
WFMPre:PT_Off, 2-214
WFMPre:WFId?, 2-215
WFMPre:XINcr, 2-215
WFMPre:XUNit, 2-216
WFMPre:XZEro, 2-217
WFMPre:YMUlt, 2-218
WFMPre:YOFf, 2-219
WFMPre:YUNit, 2-220
WFMPre:YZEro, 2-221
Z
ZOOM?, 2-222
ZOOM:FACtor, 2-222
ZOOM:HORizontal:POSition, 2-223
ZOOM:HORizontal:SCAle?, 2-223
ZOOM:MODE, 2-223
ZOOM:STATE, 2-224
V
VERBose, 2-206
TBS1000/B/EDU, TDS2000/B/C, TDS1000/B/C-EDU, TDS200, TPS2000/B Series Programmer
Index-5
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement